JP7464407B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There are pachinko gaming machines that enhance the interest of gaming by using a so-called variable display game, in which a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and when the gaming medium enters a winning area such as a winning slot provided in the gaming area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, multiple types of identification information (hereinafter, display patterns) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined gaming value is awarded is determined based on the display result. In such pachinko gaming machines, when the stopped pattern pattern when the variable display of the display pattern in the variable display game completely stops becomes a specific display pattern, a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) is entered that is advantageous to the player. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, there are gaming machines that control the machine to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

One such gaming machine is capable of executing a battle effect as a reach effect, and during the battle effect, it is further capable of executing a slow motion effect that slows down the playback speed of the battle effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-99801 A

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 had room for improvement in terms of presentation .

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the presentation and increase the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a variable display is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area;
The specific performance is,
the display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs a performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first specific performance and a second specific performance having a higher expectation level that is controlled to be in the advantageous state than the first specific performance,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The performance execution means includes:
The first display area is capable of displaying the effected video,
In the second display area, information display relating to a game can be displayed;
During the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while the effected moving image in an effect manner progressing at a first speed is displayed in the first display area,
During the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effected moving image in an effect mode proceeding at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
When executing the specific performance, the light emitting state of the light emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period,
When the first specific performance is executed, the light emitting state of the light emitting means can be changed at the same intervals during the first period and the second period;
When the second specific performance is executed, the light emission state of the light emitting means can be changed at an interval shorter than the first period during the second period;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in a normal state, the game control means is capable of controlling the game to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state;
The performance execution means includes:
In the second period, after displaying the effect video proceeding at the second speed, a still effect is executed in which a still image is displayed by freezing the effect video,
There are a plurality of still effects.
Depending on which of the presentation modes of the still presentation is, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The performance execution means includes:
The information display is operable to be displayed;
The information display operation is continued even during the still performance,
The information display can be displayed at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period,
A plurality of types of common special effects can be executed when the variable display result is the specific display result and when the variable display result is the special display result;
After the special effect is executed, a special effect suggesting that the special display result will be obtained can be executed .
It is characterized by:
This configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.
Other gaming machines include
A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command, etc.) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed, etc.).
When new judgment result information is received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the newly received judgment result information is further restricted (for example, when a reserve in which the variable display result is "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored reserve memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
moreover,
The game control system includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) capable of controlling the game to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means so that the numerical information corresponds to the special number of times. The numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information becoming a specific value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71).

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the game state changes and a variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued, and increasing motivation to play.

In addition, the embodiment for implementing the invention described below includes the invention related to the following means A. Conventionally, gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, as shown in JP 2005-95449 A, have been known. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) executed in a normal gaming state reaches 1000 times (special number of times) but no jackpot (advantageous state) occurs (special condition is established), the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, the probability that a jackpot is determined as the result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and a jackpot is more likely to occur in the subsequent special game. Patent Document 1 also describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal gaming state but no jackpot occurs, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the high probability state.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there was insufficient consideration given to the interest generated when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a special number, or in the period before and after this.

Therefore, the purpose of this invention is to provide an entertaining gaming machine.

(Means 1A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and the specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed, and the state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and a part executing steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 16-49) that is capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120) when the variable display is being executed; and a control means for starting control of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. The display device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, changing the background image as shown in Figures 16-52 (C1) and (C2), blacking out when the fluctuation starts as shown in Figure 16-53 (B), or blacking out when the fluctuation ends as shown in Figure 16-54 (C)) to notify the user that a certain condition has been satisfied (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in Figure 16-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing predetermined suggestion effects in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 16-44. See Figure 16-50).
According to such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his/her interest.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a special chart display result determination table. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a time-saving type determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. A figure showing an example of a time-saving promotional performance period. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of main performance control commands. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving start process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process at the end of a time-saving period. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a remaining reservation period end determination process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer at the start of a winning streak. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a reservation change determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when a data is dropped. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving promotion effect setting process. A figure showing an example of determining a time-saving promotion performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a return performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 11 is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display when the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary and in other cases. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process in an information output process. 6 is a timing chart showing output timings of various signals output in the external information output process. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a special chart display result determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart display result. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state. A front view of a pachinko game machine relating to characteristic part 063AK. A diagram showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device relating to feature part 063AK when the large winning opening is controlled to a closed state. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining the flow of a game ball that has entered the big prize slot related to the characteristic part 063AK. 13A is a diagram showing a configuration of a distribution unit according to the characteristic portion 063AK, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a configuration of a distribution member according to the characteristic portion 063AK. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the distribution section related to the feature part 063AK. A figure to explain the operation of the distribution member related to characteristic part 063AK. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the small win start presentation time related to feature part 063AK and the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution section. (a) is a timing chart of the performance corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining the execution presence/absence and the performance mode of the performance corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature part 063AK. 1A is a timing chart of the time-saving suggestion effect related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the time-saving suggestion pattern related to the feature portion 063AK. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal time passing prompting performance corresponding to the first special game related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining a normal time passing prompting performance corresponding to the second special game related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram for explaining a time-saving time passing prompting performance related to the feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of normal processing of special patterns related to feature part 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol display result determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol display result determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing a list of big win types related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a big win type determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing a list of small win types related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small win type determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. A figure showing a list of variation patterns related to feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a miss fluctuation pattern determination table for feature part 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a time-saving variation pattern determination table for a normal state related to a feature part 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a time-saving variation pattern determination table for a time-saving state related to a feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a special pattern stopping process related to the feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a small win start performance waiting time determination table for feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of a small win pre-release processing related to feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during the opening of a small win related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a hit end designation command determination table related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a passing notification performance waiting time determination table for feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing related to feature part 063AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a decorative pattern that is a small winning combination related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decorative pattern determination table for a small winning in a normal state related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decorative pattern determination table for a small winning in a time-saving state related to the feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process related to the feature part 063AK. 1A is a flowchart showing an example of a special winning waiting process related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a small winning start performance time determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a small win performance processing related to feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a small win end presentation processing related to feature part 063AK. 13A to 13I are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state relating to the feature part 063AK. 13A to 13G are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state relating to the feature part 063AK. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in the time-saving state related to feature section 063AK. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in the time-saving state related to feature section 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a normal hold change determination table according to a modified example of the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a limit hold change determination table according to a modified example of the feature portion 063AK. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing examples of performance operations relating to modified examples of the characteristic portion 063AK. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine having characteristic part 065AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table. A diagram showing the results of normal display and the number of time reductions. A diagram showing the special chart display results and the number of time reductions. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a normal pattern stops. A flowchart showing an example of the performance control process processing of feature unit 065AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a general map linked performance control process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special chart linked performance determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving notification setting process. This is a timing chart showing the performance content when the time-saving transition occurs in feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing the rotating display of the hold display in each hold display area, (C) is a diagram showing the moving display of the caption in the caption display area, and (D) is a diagram showing the blinking pattern of the fourth pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A diagram showing the execution decision rate of chance-up effects. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the presentation pattern of the operation promotion presentation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the presentation content of each presentation pattern. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation form of the second reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. A front view of a pachinko game machine in characteristic portion 108IW. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of time saving. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main processing in characteristic section 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 108IW. A flowchart showing a specific example of the main processing for performance control in characteristic unit 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a caption displayed while waiting for customers. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading notice setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. This is an explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of each type of preview performance. This is a time chart to explain the period of change between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue, and the period of execution of the pre-reading preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the time-saving entry appearance presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the presentation aspects of false countdown presentations and effect presentations. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process in the first modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in Modification 1. 13 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process in the first modified example. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in variant example 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining variants 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a fluctuation pattern during a time-saving state based on rescue time-saving. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process in the second embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. A timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of Example 2.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." Each of these is made up of a seven-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-." Special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided that is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning opening (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 may display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance mode. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (for example, "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. As a jackpot performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade performance to indicate that the value of the jackpot game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small jackpot game state, a small jackpot performance to notify the player of the small jackpot game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small jackpot game state and a jackpot game state for some jackpot types (a jackpot type for a jackpot game state in the same manner as a small jackpot game state, for example, a jackpot type for which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether the current state is a small jackpot game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small jackpot game state and after the end of the jackpot game state, so that the player cannot distinguish whether the current state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Sub-substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the performance control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also called sub-substrates. As in the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-substrates may be provided for different functions, or one sub-substrate may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, a specific image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a specific sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and to open the jackpot opening, based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Before returning to the processing of step S73, other processing may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview performance determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the determination result by the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result includes the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" and the case where the variable display result is "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined as one of multiple decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol. The numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which no setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 10-3 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 10-3 is stored in advance as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect varies depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision ratio of "present" to execute the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". In such a setting ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot more frequently than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Note that in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot".

Figure 10-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed, and the display color when it is changed. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, and suggests that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, and suggests that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is high. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests that the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 10-4 (B) shows an example of settings for the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 10-4 (B) is pre-stored in ROM 121 as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by, for example, referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and also suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a specified performance device, such as displaying a specified performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting specified sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off, or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as a performance execution period in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using a reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and then the variable display performance processing ends.

The change performance period may be set to a different length of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance that is often performed even in an unfavorable case (unfavorable performance), there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a sense of discomfort to the player because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and standby is performed. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command could not be received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 10-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. The decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and a reach is established, and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect, resulting in a reach development. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an effect image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, an effect image announcing a message such as "Change in symbol display color!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the symbol display color.

Figure 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 10-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 10-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 10-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that 6, the highest set value, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing and suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any gaming value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 11-1 to 11-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment performs time-saving control not only after a big win game state, but also when the time-saving pattern is stopped as a variable display result (time-saving state). And, although the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time-saving state as a display result of the special chart game, the time-saving control is not newly performed even if the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state. On the other hand, for the decorative pattern, different patterns are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time-saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK having such a feature will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

Figure 11-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched and hit into this gaming area from a specified ball launching device.

The "variable display" of the special symbol means, for example, a display of multiple types of special symbols that can be changed (the same applies to other symbols described later). The changes include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the change of the special symbol or normal symbol, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated. In the change of the decorative symbol, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The changes also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specific special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a change. The "variable display" of the special symbol includes sequential lighting or flashing of multiple LEDs, and includes the display of a specific combination of LED lights (also called derived or derived display) as the display result.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device. In the time-saving state, control (high-open control, high-base control) is executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, improving the variable efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol). In the time-saving state, a so-called right shot is performed in which the game ball is shot into the game area on the right side of the player so that the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82, and the large winning hole door forms a large winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. In the big win game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by making the game ball enter the large winning hole. Therefore, the big win game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds in the big win game state and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big win game state, a so-called right hit is performed to shoot the game ball into the right game area so that the game ball enters the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 11-1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 11-1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of Figure 6. When the start winning judgment process is started, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on or not (step S1201). If it is judged that the first start port switch 22A is on because it is judged that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch process (step S2101; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") or not (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first special symbol reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first special symbol reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the first special symbol reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102. If it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as the game control buffer setting section), to "1" (step S1203).

If it is determined in step S1201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No) or if it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special symbols has reached the upper limit (step S1202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the second start port switch 22B provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). If it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on because it is determined in the switch processing that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1204; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter (counter that counts the number of reserved second special symbols) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102. If it is determined in step S1205 that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the upper limit (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S1206). If it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No) or if it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103 ends the start winning determination process.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates the special symbol reserved memory number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value by adding 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special symbol reserved memory number count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second special symbol reserved memory number count value is added by 1. Thus, the first special symbol reserved memory number count value is updated to increase (increment) by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is established. Also, the second special symbol reserved memory number count value is updated to increase (increment) by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in a specified area of RAM 102 (such as the game control counter setting section), is updated to add 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, from among the numerical data updated by the random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or a predetermined area (such as the game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102, the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored as reserved data by being set at the top of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory section according to the start port buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the reserved data is set in the first special chart reserved memory section. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the reserved data is set in the second special chart reserved memory section. In addition, at this time, when the reserved data is set in the first special chart reserved memory section, the CPU 103 may control the first reserved display 25A to make the first reserved display 25A perform a display that can identify the first special chart reserved memory number that has been increased by one (for example, by increasing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the reserved data is set in the second special chart reserved memory section, the CPU 103 may control the second reserved display 25B to make the second reserved display 25B perform a display that can identify the second special chart reserved memory number that has been increased by one (for example, by increasing the number of lit LEDs by one).

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started even though a game ball has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and a first start winning has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball's entry, until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

The reserved number in the first special chart reserved memory section and the display position of the reserved display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when reserved data is stored in the first special chart reserved memory section, the reserved display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reserved number associated with this reserved data. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "1", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the far left side of the first reserved display section 5HL. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "2", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the second display position located to the right of the first display position of the first reserved display section 5HL.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started even though a game ball has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and a second start winning has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition by the game ball's entry, as reservation data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

The reserved number in the second special chart reserved memory section and the display position of the reserved display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when reserved data is stored in the second special chart reserved memory section, the reserved display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reserved number associated with this reserved data. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "1", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the far left side of the second reserved display section 5HR. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "2", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the second display position located to the right of the first display position of the second reserved display section 5HR.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a prepared start gate winning designation command to the performance control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a prepared pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (step S1212).

Then, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process for determining the start winning time, and is a process for determining whether the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the random number value will be a "big win" or a "small win" based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S1215), and then ends the starting winning determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes its stored value to "0" (step S1216) before proceeding to step S1204. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

Figure 11-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of Figure 11-2 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) to a big win game state or a small win game state as a "big win" or a "small win". In addition, in the variable pattern setting process, the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning port (the first start winning port or the second start winning port), it is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the random number value extracted at this timing (the random number value extracted in the process of step S1209) will be a "big win" or a "small win", and it is determined which variable display pattern of the decorative symbol will be (so-called "pre-reading"). As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball entering the starting winning hole begins (before the start conditions of the special symbol game are met), it is possible to predict in advance that the special symbol display result will be a "big win" or "small win" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a predetermined display mode, and based on this prediction result, the display mode of the pending display can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 on the performance control board 12 side.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-3, the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag (a flag that is turned on when in the time-saving state) and the probability variable flag (a flag that is turned on when in the probability variable state) provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control flag setting section) of the RAM 102 (step S351). The CPU 103 identifies whether the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state or not by, for example, checking the value of the special chart process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control flag control section) of the RAM 102. For example, if the value of the special chart process flag is between "4" and "7", it can be determined that the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state.

Following the processing of step S351, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the specified game state is a jackpot game state (step S352). If it is judged that the game state is not a jackpot game state (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further judges whether or not the game state is a high base state in which high opening control is performed in conjunction with time-saving control in a probability variable state or time-saving state (step S353). If it is judged that the game state is a high base state (step S353; Yes), or if it is judged that the game state is a jackpot in the processing of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether or not the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354). If it is judged that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 performs settings to limit the judgment at the time of winning (step S356).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of step S353 that the game is not in a high base state (step S353; No), the CPU 103 selects a special chart display result determination table from the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table to be used to determine the special chart display result in accordance with the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") or the current game state (step S355).

Following the processing of step S355, the CPU 103 judges whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). For example, the CPU 103 may judge whether there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing each determination value included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted by the processing of step S1209 shown in FIG. 11-2 one by one. Alternatively, values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum value and maximum value of the jackpot determination range to judge whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by judging that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be judged that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot" (jackpot start judgment).

In the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special chart reserved memory unit in step S1210, and make the above judgment using the read random number value MR1. The CPU 103 may also store the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special chart reserved memory unit) or in a memory area of the CPU 103, separately from step S1210, and make the above judgment based on the stored random number value. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described below. In this way, the random number value used in the winning random number value judgment process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special chart reserved memory unit.

When it is determined in the processing of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for determining the jackpot type from the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart specified corresponding to the start port buffer value (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2"). The CPU 103 determines which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type is to be determined as by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type.

Following the processing of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-11) that has been prepared in advance by storing it in a specified area of the ROM 101, which will be described later, and sets it as the table to be used (step S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the variable display that results in a "jackpot", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3.

If it is determined in the processing of step S357 that the random number value MR1 is not within the big win determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step S360). The CPU 103 can determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination range by performing the same processing as in the case of the big win determination range for the determination value assigned to the special display result of "small win" in the special display result determination table selected by the processing of step S305.

If it is determined that the value is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 11-11(B)) that has been prepared in advance by storing the value in a specified area of ROM 101 is selected and set as the table to be used (step S362). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display that results in a "small hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the random number MR1 is not within the small win determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001). The CPU 103 can determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the time-saving determination range by performing the same process as in the case of the big win determination range for the determination value assigned to the special chart display result of "miss (time-saving)" in the special chart display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. Note that although the special chart display result of "miss (time-saving)" is a "miss," it indicates a variable display result in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and the time-saving control is performed from the variable display that is performed after the stopped display.

If it is determined that the time-saving type is within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time-saving type based on the random number value MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for determining the time-saving type from the time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 according to the variable special chart specified corresponding to the start port buffer value (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2"). The CPU 103 determines which of the multiple types of time-saving type is to be determined by referring to the selected table data for determining the time-saving type.

Following the processing of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 selects a miss fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figs. 11-12 (A) and (D)) when the time-saving start flag is on, which is prepared in advance by storing it in a specified area of the ROM 101, and sets it as the table to be used (step 059AKS002A). The miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on is a table for determining a fluctuation pattern of a variable display in which the variable display result is a "miss" but the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, and a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. In step 059AKS002A, it is sufficient to select either the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on in Fig. 11-12 (A) or the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on in Fig. 11-12 (D) according to the type of time-saving.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag is not within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), a miss fluctuation pattern determination table for when the time-saving start flag is off (see Figure 11-12 (B)), which has been prepared in advance by storing it in a specified area of ROM 101, is selected and set as the table to be used (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any one of steps S309, S312, S059AKS002A, and S059AKS002B, the CPU 103 refers to any one of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the small jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is off, set in the usage table, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in S1209, and determines the fluctuation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3 (S363). For example, the CPU 103 may determine the fluctuation pattern by comparing each individual determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3, or may set values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 may determine the fluctuation pattern by comparing the random number value MR3 with the minimum and maximum determination values.

After executing either the process of step S356 or S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a start winning command whose contents correspond to the judgment results of step S358, step 059AKS002, or step S363 (step S364), and ends the winning random number judgment process. The start winning command is composed of a start winning designation command, a special reserved memory number designation command, a pattern judgment result designation command, and a fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start winning buffer value is "1", the first start winning designation command, the first special reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are set to be sent as the start winning command. When the start winning buffer value is "2", the second start winning designation command, the second special reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are set to be sent as the start winning command. Commands set for transmission are sent during command control processing.

The first special chart reserved memory count designation command and second special chart reserved memory count designation command to be set for transmission are commands that designate the current first special chart reserved memory count or second special chart reserved memory count (commands including EXT data corresponding to the relevant memory count), and the designated number of special chart reserved memories can be determined by the count value of the first special chart reserved memory count counter or the second special chart reserved memory count counter. The symbol designation command to be set for transmission is a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "big win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "big win") when the judgment result of step S357 is within the big win determination range (step S357; Yes), a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "small win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "small win") when the judgment result of step S357 is within the small win determination range (step S360; Yes), and a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "small win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "small win") when the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes). When the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is not within the time-shortening determination range (step S360; No), the command to specify that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "miss" (a command including EXT data corresponding to "miss") can be used; and when the judgment result of step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), the command to specify that no judgment was made at the time of the start winning is "no judgment" (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The fluctuation pattern determination result designation command to be set for transmission should be a command that designates the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command including EXT data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result), and when the determination result in step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), it should be a command that designates "no determination" that no determination was made at the time of the start winning (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no determination").

In the random number value judgment process at the time of winning, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted this time in step S1209, whether the variable display result of the variable display (special game) will be a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss (time reduction)", and the variable display's fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 11-10) are judged, and so-called pre-reading is performed. Note that in this process, the judgment is made based on the current game state, and not based on the game state when the variable display is actually executed, so the judgment is not necessarily accurate, but it is possible to predict the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern with a certain degree of accuracy. In addition, in the random number value judgment process at the time of winning, if it is judged in the process of step S352 that a big win is occurring, or based on the judgment in the process of step S353 that time reduction control is being performed, it is judged in the process of step S354 whether the start port buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the process of step S355 and the like, and the judgment at the time of the start winning is not made. In this way, when high opening control accompanying time-saving control is performed or in a jackpot game state, the above judgments are restricted so that they are not made based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by the game ball entering the first start winning port. In this way, when the special chart game using the second special chart is executed in priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, when time-saving control is in progress or in a jackpot game state, the pre-reading based on the first start winning is restricted from being executed, thereby ensuring the soundness of the game.

Figure 11-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 11-4, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" (step S1231). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step S1231, the second reserved memory count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be judged whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 151B corresponding to reserved number "1" (step S1232). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step S1232, the second reserved memory count is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory count, for example, and the reserved data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory unit 151B (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step S1233). Also, in the processing of step S1233, the total reserved memory count stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory count. At this time, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step S1235). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the RAM 102 is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step S1235 is executed when it is determined in step S1231 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and for example, the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out as reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 151A corresponding to reserved number "1" (step S1236). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step S1236, for example, the first reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the first special chart reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicated by the random numbers MR1 and MR2 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit 151A (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step S1237). Also, in the processing of step S1237, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved memory count value. At this time, the variable special chart designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either the process of step S1234 or S1238, the special symbol display result determination table corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step S1239). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) is set as the table to be used. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) is set as the table to be used. The CPU 103 may also select the special symbol display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state.

The first special pattern display result determination table is a table which is referenced to determine, before a confirmed special pattern which is the variable display result in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, or whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "miss (time reduction)" to a time reduction state from the subsequent variable display, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result. The second special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine, before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "big hit" to a big hit game state, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, or whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "miss (time reduction)" from the subsequent variable display to a time reduction state, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the first special chart display result determination table, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is normal or time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "jackpot", "small win", "miss (time-saving)", and "miss". In the second special chart display result determination table, depending on whether the game state is normal or time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "jackpot", "miss (time-saving)", and "miss".

In the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" or whether or not to control the special chart display result to a time-saving state from the next variable display as a "miss (time-saving)". In each of the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state). That is, in each of the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time-saving state. In addition, in the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the determination data is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and that the next variable display will be controlled to the time-saving state is higher. Therefore, the rate at which the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" is higher in the variable display corresponding to the reserved second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state.

In the example of the setting of the first special symbol display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the "small hit" special symbol display result. On the other hand, in the example of the setting of the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, no determination value is assigned to the "small hit" special symbol display result. With such a setting, the ratio at which the special symbol display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state can be made different between the case where the variable display result is determined based on the first start condition being satisfied for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the variable display result is determined based on the second start condition being satisfied for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In particular, in a special chart game using the second special chart, the special chart display result is not determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state, so that in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, such as a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability change state (high probability high base state), frequent occurrence of a small win game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game due to prolonged play can be prevented. In addition, in the second special chart display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special chart display result determination table may also be assigned to the special chart display result of a "small win". For example, in the second special chart display result determination table, a smaller determination value than that in the first special chart display result determination table may be assigned to the special chart display result of a "small win". In this way, when the game is in a high base state such as a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the ratio of determining that the game will be controlled to a small win game state may be lower than when the game is in a low base state such as a normal state or a probability-changing state without time-saving. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first or second start condition is met, the special chart display result may be determined by referring to a common special chart display result determination table.

Following the processing of step S1239 shown in FIG. 11-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination values assigned to each of the special chart display results of "big hit", "small hit", "miss (time reduction)", and "miss" to determine whether the special chart display result will be "big hit", "small hit", "miss (time reduction)", or "miss" (step S1240).

In step S1239, the table data for determining the special chart display result corresponding to the current game state is selected, so in the process of step S1240, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a probability variable state or not, different determination data is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot". For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a normal state or a time-saving state, table data corresponding to the normal state or the time-saving state in the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table is selected as normal determination data, and the special chart display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a probability variable state, table data corresponding to the case when the game state is a probability variable state in the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table is selected as special determination data, and the special chart display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this.

After the special chart display result is determined in step S1240, it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not (step S1241). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step S1241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of multiple types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of several types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-probable jackpot", "probable jackpot", and "sudden jackpot", depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

In the example of the setting of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "sudden certainty" differs depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variable special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "sudden certainty", while when the variable special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot type of "sudden certainty". With such a setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type as "sudden certainty" can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first start condition for starting a special chart game using the first special chart by the first special chart display device 4A being satisfied, and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the second start condition for starting a special chart game using the second special chart by the second special chart display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special chart, the jackpot type is not determined to be "suddenly confirmed" and controlled to a short-term opening jackpot state, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time-saving control, frequent occurrence of a short-term opening jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game due to prolonged play can be prevented.

In addition, even when the variable special chart is the second special chart, a predetermined range of determined values different from when the variable special chart is the first special chart may be assigned to the "sudden" jackpot type. For example, when the variable special chart is the second special chart, a smaller determined value may be assigned to the "sudden" jackpot type compared to when the variable special chart is the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 11-4, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the variable random number buffer matches any of the determination values assigned to each of the jackpot types of "non-certainty", "certainty", and "sudden certainty" (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special symbol as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a sure-win state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a storage value of a jackpot type buffer provided in RAM 102 (step S1245). As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-sure-win", the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "sure-win", it can be set to "1", and if it is "sudden sure-win", it can be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that the result is not a "big win" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "small win" or not (step S1246). Then, if it is determined that the result is a "small win" (step S1246; Yes), the small win flag provided in RAM 102 is set to ON (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that the result is not a "small win" (step S1246; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "time-saving") (step 059AKS003). Then, if it is determined that the result is a "time-saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 selects and sets the time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 as the table to be used for determining the time-saving type as one of several types, and determines the time-saving type based on the random number value MR2, in the same way as when determining the big win type (step 059AKS004).

The time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 is a table that is referenced to determine one of a number of types of time-saving type based on MR2, which is also the random number value for determining the jackpot type, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and that the time-saving state is to be controlled. In the time-saving type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the time-saving type is assigned to a number of types of jackpot types, such as "time-saving A" to "time-saving D," depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (fluctuated) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B). As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, if the special pattern that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special pattern game is the first special pattern, the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B", and if the special pattern that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special pattern game is the second special pattern, the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving C" or "Time-saving D". "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving C" are time-saving types that are controlled to the time-saving state while 100 special pattern games are played. "Time-saving B" is a time-saving type that is controlled to the time-saving state while 50 special pattern games are played. "Time-saving D" is a time-saving type that is controlled to the time-saving state while 20 special pattern games are played.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 in FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 stores the determined time-saving type by, for example, setting a time-saving type buffer value, which is a stored value in a time-saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the time-saving type determined in step 059AKS004 (step 059AKS005). As an example, if the time-saving type is "time-saving A", the time-saving type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "time-saving B", to "1", if it is "time-saving C", to "2", and if it is "time-saving D", to "3".

After executing the processing of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006). The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as the time-saving flag). If the time-saving flag is in the OFF state (step 059AKS006; No), the time-saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006A). The time-saving start flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control will start from the next special game to be played.

If step 059AKS003 determines that it is not a "miss (time-saving)" (step 059AKS003; No), if step 059AKS006 determines that the time-saving flag is on (step 059AKS006; Yes), or after executing any of the processes of steps S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, a fixed special pattern is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether to control the game state to a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state or whether to control the game state to the next time-saving state, and further, the determined result of the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot game state, or the determined result of the type of time-saving state in the case of a time-saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special display result is not "miss (time-saving)", a special pattern showing the symbol "-" which is a miss pattern is set as the confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determined result that the special display result is "miss". On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special display result is "miss (time-saving)", one of the special patterns showing the numbers "1", "4", "6", and "8" which are time-saving patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern according to the determination result of the time-saving type in step 059AKS004. That is, according to the determination result of the time-saving type being "time-saving A", a special pattern showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special pattern. Also, according to the determination result of the time-saving type being "time-saving B", a special pattern showing the number "4" is set as the confirmed special pattern. According to the determination result of the time-saving type being "time-saving C", a special pattern showing the number "6" is set as the confirmed special pattern. Depending on the result of deciding that the time-saving type is "Time-saving D," the special symbol showing the number "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol.

If the special chart display result is determined to be a "small win" in step S1246, the special chart showing the number "2" which is a small win pattern is set as the confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determined result that the special chart display result is a "small win". Also, if the special chart display result is determined to be a "big win" in step S1241, one of the special charts showing the numbers "3", "5", or "7" which are the big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern according to the determination result of the big win type in step S1244. That is, according to the determination result of the big win type being "non-probability change", the special chart showing the number "3" which is the normal big win pattern among the normal opening round big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern. Also, according to the determination result of the big win type being "probability change", the special chart showing the number "7" which is the probability change pattern among the normal opening round big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern. Depending on the result of determining that the jackpot type is "suddenly confirmed," the special symbol showing the number "5," which is the symbol for a short-term opening jackpot, is set as the confirmed special symbol.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step S1249), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S1250), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, for example, has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, a setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 11-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in Figure 6. When the fluctuation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step S261). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-11 (A) and determines a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot when the special chart display result is "jackpot" (step S262).

Figure 11-10 shows an example of a variation pattern in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" and "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" or "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern. In the feature part 059AK, a variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) dedicated to the time of a miss (time-saving) that is selected only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and a variation pattern of a false time-saving that suggests that the variable display result will be a "miss (time-saving)" but is actually a "miss" are prepared. Regarding the variation pattern dedicated to the time of a miss (time-saving) that is selected only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)", for example, there may be a variation pattern of a super reach performance that is executed only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)", such as the variation pattern of a super reach D.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a super reach is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the variable display result being a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The super reach fluctuation pattern includes reach performances such as Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss".

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11(A) is a table that is referenced to determine one of several types of fluctuation patterns based on the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, depending on the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special chart display result is a "jackpot". In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11(A), depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", "probability variable", or "sudden probability variable", the number (determination value) compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB4-3, and PC1-1 to PC1-3.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11-11(A), there is a portion in which a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the proportion determined for each fluctuation pattern differs depending on which of the multiple types of jackpots is determined to be the jackpot type. For example, the allocation of determination values to fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, and PB4-3 differs depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" or "probable variable." This makes it possible to vary the proportion determined for the same fluctuation pattern depending on the result of determining which of the multiple types of jackpots to determine.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there is a portion in which a determination value is assigned to a different fluctuation pattern depending on which of the multiple types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change", a determination value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3, while a determination value is not assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3. In contrast, when the jackpot type is "sudden probability", a determination value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while a determination value is not assigned to fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3. As a result, when the special chart display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is controlled to a short-term opening jackpot state according to "sudden probability", a fluctuation pattern different from the case of being controlled to a normal opening jackpot state can be determined.

In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability", the allocation of the determination value to each variation pattern may be made different depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-saving state. This makes it possible to make the ratio of being determined to the same variation pattern different depending on whether the game state is in one of the multiple types. In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability", the determination value may be assigned to a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-saving state. This makes it possible to determine a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state is in one of the multiple types. In this embodiment, more determination values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1, which indicates the variation pattern of the normal reach, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", than when it is "probability change". Therefore, when the reach effect of the Super Reach is executed, the chance of the jackpot type being a "probable win" is higher than that of a "non-probable win", which gives the player hope and increases his/her interest in the game. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11(A), more determination values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB4-2 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach B than to the fluctuation pattern PB4-1 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach C, and to the fluctuation pattern PB4-3 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach A than to the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the fluctuation time becomes longer (see the fluctuation time in FIG. 11-10).

Returning to FIG. 11-8, if it is determined in the processing of step S261 that the big win flag is off (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small win flag is on (step S263). If it is determined that the small win flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small win fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-11 (B) and determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small win when the special chart display result is "small win" (step S264).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag is in the OFF state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS007). If it is determined that the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time-saving start flag is ON, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A), (C), and (D) (step 059AKS008). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag is in the OFF state (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time-saving start flag is OFF, as shown in Figures 11-12 (B) and (E) (step 059AKS009).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to a miss when the special chart display result is "miss (time reduction)" or "miss" depending on the type of special chart, such as whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, and whether or not the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, when the special chart display result is "miss (time reduction)" and the variable special chart is the first special chart, regardless of whether or not time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction start flag on time miss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-12 (A) is referenced, and the variation pattern is determined to be one of multiple types depending on the type of time reduction based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the variation random number buffer. On the other hand, when the special chart display result is "miss (time reduction)" and the variable special chart is the second special chart, depending on whether or not the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction start flag on time failure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-12 (C) or (D) is referred to, and the variation pattern is determined to one of several types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Also, when the special chart display result is "miss" and the variable special chart is the first special chart, depending on whether or not the time reduction control is being performed in the time reduction state ... On the other hand, in the normal state, the time-saving start flag OFF miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-12 (E) is referenced, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (when the time-saving start flag ON miss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the determination value is assigned so that the time-saving type is determined at different rates according to the type of super reach. Specifically, the determination value is assigned so that the time-saving type with the highest number of time-savings is determined when the super reach with a high jackpot expectation is executed (the determination value is assigned so that the rate of the time-saving type of "time-saving A" is higher for B than for super reach C). Also, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (when the time-saving start flag ON miss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the determination value is not assigned to the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation. That is, in the feature part 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the rate of "miss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of super reach. In addition, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 11-11 and FIG. 11-12, when the reach performance of the super reach B or the super reach C is executed, the determination value is assigned so that a plurality of variable display results are obtained, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or a simple miss. Therefore, the variation of the performance results is increased, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second start winning hole is provided in the game area on the right side for the player, and the game ball wins only when the so-called right hit is made. Therefore, in the feature part 059AK, the second special chart changes in the time reduction state by the player hitting the right in the time reduction state. On the other hand, when the time reduction control is ended and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special chart remains, the second special chart changes in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the second special chart changes only when the time-saving control ends and reserved memory corresponding to the second special chart remains. Therefore, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 11-12(E), the variable display (variation) variation pattern determination table corresponds to the maximum number of variable displays performed after the time-saving control ends, which is four times (corresponding to the maximum number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special chart, which is "4").

Returning to FIG. 11-8, after executing the processing of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the time-saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). If the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether or not the determined fluctuation pattern is PB2-4 indicating that it is a fluctuation pattern of time-saving confirmation (i.e., a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time-saving when it is a miss (time-saving)) (step 059AKS012). If the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, a time-saving promotion performance period as a period for executing the time-saving promotion performance described later is added to the special chart fluctuation time indicated by the determined fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS013). Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 11-9, a time-saving promotion performance period according to the time-saving type may be added. In addition, PB2-4, which is a special fluctuation pattern for when you lose (time-saving), and PB2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern for false time-saving, include a time-saving teasing performance period (10 seconds) in the special chart fluctuation time shown in Figure 11-10. The time-saving teasing performance is a performance that teases whether or not the time-saving pattern, which is a decorative pattern that indicates that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be displayed as the final stopping pattern of the decorative patterns.

After executing any one of the processes of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 in FIG. 11-8, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol fluctuation time (also called the fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the determined special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-10, the special symbol fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with multiple fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, it is a period to which a time-saving teasing performance period has been added. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is derived by setting the special pattern variable time corresponding to the variable pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (the period to which the time-saving teasing performance period is added when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed). The special pattern variable time is set, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special pattern variable time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the time-saving start flag is in the on state and the determined variable pattern is not PB2-4, an example is shown in which the time-saving teasing performance period as a period for executing the time-saving teasing performance is added to the special pattern variable time indicated by the variation pattern, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period may be added to the special pattern variable time. In this case, just like the time-saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type can be added, and the processing can be the same as in step 059AKS013. Specifically, the periods corresponding to "Time-saving A," "Time-saving B," and "Time-saving C" shown in FIG. 11-9 can be added as periods corresponding to "Non-probability change," "probability change," and "sudden probability change."

Following the processing of step S266, a setting is made to start the variation of the special pattern so that either the special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the special pattern game using the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B, for which the start condition is satisfied, is started (step S267). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B. This starts the special pattern game. Note that when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special pattern, it may control the first reserved indicator 25A to make the first reserved indicator 25A perform a display that can identify the first special pattern reserved memory number that has been subtracted by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special chart, it may control the second reserved display 25B to cause the second reserved display 25B to display an indication that identifies the second special chart reserved memory number that has been reduced by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 performs a transmission setting for a command (a command at the start of the variation of the special pattern) at the start of the variation of the special pattern in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special pattern display result and the result of the determination of the variation pattern (step S268). For example, when the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 performs a transmission setting for sequentially transmitting a first variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264, or S265), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special pattern reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the first special pattern reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, the number of first special pattern reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of the execution of the special pattern game) as a variation start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as a variable start command, a second variable start designation command, a variable pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special chart reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the second special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, the number of second special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game).

After executing the processing of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "2" (step S267) and then ends the variation pattern setting processing.

Figure 11-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 11-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmation display flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting section) of the RAM 102 is on (step S291). Here, the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described below in response to the derivation and display of a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special pattern confirmation display flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), settings are made to derive and display the confirmed special pattern (step S292). At this time, a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process is performed to send a decorative pattern stop command to the performance control board 12 (step 059AKS021). The decorative pattern stop command is also called a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed, and is also a command that specifies the period (confirmation period) for which the derived and displayed decorative pattern is to be displayed.

Here, we will explain the main performance control commands sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by the command control process with reference to Figures 11-14. Note that "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number.

Command 80XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern designation command) that designates the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command is set that corresponds to each variation pattern. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and this number is set as "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of the variation of the decorative pattern.

Command 8A01 (H) is a presentation control command (first start port winning designation command) that specifies that a first start winning has occurred due to a gaming medium entering the first start port. Command 8A02 (H) is a presentation control command (second start port winning designation command) that specifies that a second start winning has occurred due to a gaming medium entering the second start port. The first start port winning designation command and the second start port winning designation command are sometimes collectively referred to as start port winning designation commands.

Command 8CXX (H) is a presentation control command (display result specification command) that specifies whether or not to treat it as a jackpot or a miss (time-saving), and the type of jackpot or the type of time-saving, i.e., it is a performance control command that specifies a variable display result. In this embodiment, a display result specification command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, each display result is assigned a unique number, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "miss", "01" for "miss (time-saving A)" with time-saving type "time-saving A" and "jackpot" with "probable change", etc.).

Command 8D01 (H) is a presentation control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a presentation control command (second variation start designation command) that designates the start of the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as the variation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is to be started may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described below.

Command 8FXX (H) is a presentation control command (pattern determination command) that specifies that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed, and is also a command that specifies the period (determination period) for which the derived and displayed decorative pattern is displayed. In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, display result determination commands are set that correspond to whether or not the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)" and to each type of time reduction when the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)". For example, if the variable display result is not "miss (time saving)", "XX" in the command is set to "00", and if the variable display result is "miss (time saving)", a unique number is assigned according to the time saving type, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", it is "01", if the time saving type is "time saving B", it is "02", if the time saving type is "time saving C", it is "03", if the time saving type is "time saving D", it is "04", etc.).

Command 95XX (H) is a presentation control command (game state designation command) that designates the game state. In this embodiment, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the game state is a high probability low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the game state is a high probability high base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the game state is a low probability high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game state (start of fanfare). Note that a fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of a jackpot game state to notify the player that a jackpot game state has been reached. Command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of a small jackpot game state.

Command A2XX(H) is a presentation control command (command to specify when the large prize opening is open) that specifies the opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX(H) is a presentation control command (command to specify after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the closing of the special variable prize ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Command A601 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game state (start of the ending). Note that an ending is a presentation that is executed when the jackpot game state ends, and notifies the player that the jackpot game state is ending. Command A602 (H) is a presentation control command (small jackpot end designation command) that specifies the end of the small jackpot game state.

Command C1XX (H) is a performance control command (first special chart reserved memory number designation command) that specifies the first special chart reserved memory number. "XX" indicates the first special chart reserved memory number. Command C2XX (H) is a performance control command (second special chart reserved memory number designation command) that specifies the second special chart reserved memory number. "XX" indicates the second special chart reserved memory number. The first special chart reserved memory number designation command and the second special chart reserved memory number designation command are sometimes collectively referred to as the special chart reserved memory number designation command.

Command C4XX (H) is a presentation control command (symbol determination result designation command) that specifies the display result among the determination results at the time of the start winning. Command C5XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) that specifies the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of the start winning. In this embodiment, in the processing of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second start winning occurs, random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. For the variable display corresponding to the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3, before the start condition of the variable display is established, it is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" or not, and the variation pattern of the variable display, based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3. The determination at the time of the start winning refers to these determinations, and is performed in the random number value determination processing at the time of winning in step S1213 (see FIG. 11-3). Note that in certain cases, this determination may not be made. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including no judgment) for the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the pattern designation command (for example, "00" for "no judgment", "01" for "miss", etc. are set, a unique number is assigned according to the type of time-saving for "miss (time-saving)", and a unique number is assigned according to the type of jackpot for "jackpot"). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including no judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern designation command (for example, "00" for "no judgment", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

Figure 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of Figure 11-13 as the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process. The decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process is a process for setting transmission of the decorative pattern stop command according to the variable display result and the time-saving type. In the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS041). If the time-saving flag is set to the OFF state (step 059AKS041; No), it determines whether the time-saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS042). If the time-saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS042; Yes), since the current variable display result is "miss (time-saving)", the CPU 103 sets transmission of the decorative pattern stop command according to the time-saving type (step 059AKS043) and ends the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 11-15(B), a decorative pattern stop command (pattern determination command) that is predetermined according to the time-saving type is set. As shown in the figure, the determination time is 10 seconds for "time-saving A" and "time-saving B", while the determination time is 5 seconds for "time-saving C" and 2 seconds for "time-saving D". The time-saving types of "time-saving A" and "time-saving B" are time-saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the first special pattern is "miss (time-saving)", and the time-saving types of "time-saving C" and "time-saving D" are time-saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the second special pattern is "miss (time-saving)". Therefore, the determination time differs between when the variable display result of the first special pattern is "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result of the second special pattern is "miss (time-saving)", and the variation of the variable display increases, which can improve the interest in the game. In addition, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "miss (time shortening)", the fixed period differs depending on the type of time shortening, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the fixed period. In addition, in the feature part 059AK, the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time shortening state is not in effect, so that the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) second special symbol remaining after the time shortening ends is "miss (time shortening)", and the fixed time is determined according to the time shortening type of "time shortening C" and "time shortening D" shown in the figure. In other words, in a short period after the time shortening ends (at most after the end of the period of four variable displays of the maximum reserved memory number of the second special symbol), the fixed time is shorter than when the variable display result corresponding to the first special symbol in the normal state is "miss (time shortening)" ("time shortening A" and "time shortening B") as shown in the figure. Therefore, by lengthening the fixed period for the normal state and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is necessary to clearly inform the player that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, it is possible to provide a period during which the player is clearly informed that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state. Also, if the game is to be controlled to the time-saving state again in a short period of time after the time-saving state ends, a long fixed period may reduce interest in the game, so the fixed period is shortened to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If the time-saving flag is ON in step 059AKS041 of FIG. 11-15(A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), or if the time-saving start flag is OFF in step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), the CPU 103 sets the decorative symbol stop command to send command 8F00 (fixed period 0.5 seconds) (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative symbol stop command sending setting process.

Returning to FIG. 11-13, after executing the processing of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 sets the fixed period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, or 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the decorative symbol stop command (symbol fixed command) set in step 059AKS021 as the special symbol fixed display time (step 059AKS022). Note that in the processing of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value determined in advance according to the variable display result and time-saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, the special symbol fixed display flag is set to the ON state (step S295), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In this way, after the determined special pattern is derived and displayed by the processing of step S292, until the determined special pattern display time set in step 059AKS022 has elapsed, the determined special pattern display flag is determined to be on in step S291 each time the special pattern stop processing is executed in the special pattern process processing in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt.

When the special symbol confirmation display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer whose timer initial value was set in the process of step S294, is read, and whether the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed can be determined depending on whether the timer value has become "0". Note that if the game control process timer value is a value other than "0", it can be updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated, and the special symbol confirmation display time is waited for to elapse.

When the special chart confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), the special chart confirmation display flag is cleared to the off state (step S297), and then it is determined whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step S299). In addition, a setting is made to send the jackpot start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance to send the jackpot start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value may be stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Following the processing of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared to the OFF state (step S301). In addition, settings are made to end the special probability state, the time-saving state, and the remaining reserved period described below (step 059AKS023). For example, the processing of step 059AKS023 may include clearing the special probability flag, the time-saving flag, and the remaining reserved period flag to the OFF state, and clearing the time-saving counter for counting the remaining number of special games executed in the time-saving state. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-jackpot opening processing (step S303), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the small win start presentation waiting time (step S305). Next, a setting is made to send a hit start designation command corresponding to the special chart display result becoming "small win" from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step S307). In addition, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether the time-saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time-saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time-saving start processing is executed (step 059AKS025). Details of the time-saving start processing will be described later. After executing the processing of step 059AKS025, or if the time-saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special chart process flag and initializes its value to "0" (step S309). After executing either the processing of step S308 or S309, it is determined whether to end the time-saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the processing of step 059AKS027, when the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the time-saving count counter, is updated, for example by subtracting 1. Then, it is determined whether the updated time-saving count value matches a predetermined time-saving end judgment value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time-saving end judgment value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time-saving end judgment value, it is determined as No.

When the time-saving state is to be ended (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the time-saving end processing (step 059AKS028). Details of the time-saving end processing will be described later. After executing the processing of step 059AKS028, or when the time-saving state is not to be ended in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 judges whether or not it is the remaining reserved period (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining reserved period may be judged by checking whether or not the remaining reserved period flag described later is set to the on state. When it is the remaining reserved period, that is, when the remaining reserved period flag is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining reserved period end judgment processing (step 059AKS031) and then ends the special pattern stop processing. Details of the remaining reserved period end judgment processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it is not the remaining reserved period, i.e., if the remaining reserved period flag is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

Figure 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 059AKS025 of Figure 11-13 as the time-saving start processing. The time-saving start processing is processing in which the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" and settings are made to perform time-saving control from the next variable display. In the time-saving start processing shown in Figure 11-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time-saving start flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS051) and sets the time-saving in progress flag to the ON state (step 059AKS052). Next, it is determined whether the remaining reserved period flag is ON or not (step 059AKS053). The remaining reservation period flag is a flag indicating that a variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends is in progress, and is set to the ON state by the processing of step 059AKS063 (see FIG. 11-17) described later, and is cleared to the OFF state when all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends (step 059AKS072 described later), or when the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends becomes a "miss (time-saving period)" (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 11-16 that the flag is in the OFF state during the remaining reserved period (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 sets up to send a right hit command to instruct the player to hit the ball to the right, which is to launch the game ball into the game area on the right side (step 059AKS054), and ends the time-saving start processing. The right hit command set in the processing of step 059AKS054 is sent to the performance control board 12, and a right hit instruction display is displayed on the performance control board 12 in the manner shown in FIG. 11-33 (F).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 11-16 that the remaining reserved period flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining reserved period flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS055) and clears various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the remaining reserved count value and the time-saving end variable count value described later may be cleared to the initial value of "0". The time-saving end variable count value, like the remaining reserved count value, may be provided in a specified area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays that have been performed since the time-saving state ended. Although not shown in the figure, the time-saving end variable count value may be incremented by +1 each time a variable display is performed when the remaining reserved period flag is in the ON state in the special pattern variable process in step S112 of FIG. 6, for example.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS056 in FIG. 11-16, the CPU 103 sets up to send a simple mode right-hit instruction command (step 059AKS057) and ends the processing at the start of the time-saving feature. The simple mode right-hit instruction command set up in the processing of step 059AKS057 is sent to the performance control board 12, and a right-hit instruction display of the mode shown in FIG. 11-35 (O) is displayed on the performance control board 12. The simple mode right-hit instruction command set up for sending in step 059AKS057 in FIG. 11-16 differs from the right-hit instruction command set up for sending in the processing of step 059AKS054, and this is because the variable display result during the remaining reserved period is a "miss (time-saving feature)." Specifically, since the game will be controlled to the time-saving state again in a short period of time after the time-saving period ends (at most after the end of the period of four variable displays of the maximum reserved memory number of the second special chart), if the right-hit instruction command set to be sent in the processing of step 059AKS054 is sent in the processing of step 059AKS057, it may be annoyed to the player. Therefore, in the processing of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-hit instruction in a simple manner is sent to prevent the game from being annoyed and reducing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 11-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 059AKS028 of Figure 11-13 as the time-saving end processing. The time-saving end processing is a processing to end the time-saving control and set the remaining reserved period. In the case of a probability variable state in which the time-saving flag is on and the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to end the time-saving control even in the probability variable state, and the time-saving control may be ended based on the determination result that the time-saving control should be ended. When the time-saving control is ended in this way, the probability variable control may also be ended to return to the normal state, or the probability variable control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot" or until a predetermined number of special game games have been executed.

In the time-saving end processing shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time-saving flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Next, it is determined whether or not a second special symbol is reserved (remaining reservation) (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, it is possible to determine whether or not a second special symbol is reserved (remaining reservation) by checking the reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in a specified area of the RAM 102.

If there is a reserved second special chart (remaining reservation) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the remaining reservation period flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS063), and the remaining reservation number count value is set according to the number of reserved second special charts (remaining reservations) (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of reserved information corresponding to the second special chart stored in a specified area of RAM 102 is "4", the remaining reservation number count value is set to "4", if it is "3", it is set to "3", if it is "2", it is set to "2", and if it is "1", it is set to "1".

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes the fluctuation count value after the time-saving period ends by setting it to "0" (step 059AKS065). Since the fluctuation count value after the time-saving period ends is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 11-16, if it is "0", the process of step 059AKS065 may be skipped. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets up to send a right-hit erase command to erase the right-hit instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the process at the end of the time-saving period. The right-hit erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 is sent to the performance control board 12, and the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 11-30 is executed on the performance control board 12 side, and the right-hit instruction display is erased.

If it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 11-17 that there is no reserved second special chart (remaining reservation) (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 sets up to send a left hit instruction command to instruct the player to return to so-called left hit, which fires the game ball into the game area on the left side (step 059AKS067), and ends the time-saving end processing.

Figure 11-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of Figure 11-13 as the remaining reservation period end judgment process. The remaining reservation period end judgment process is a process that judges whether the remaining reservation period has ended, that is, whether all variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time reduction has ended, and ends the remaining reservation period if they have ended. In the remaining reservation period end judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the fluctuation count value after the time reduction ends matches the remaining reservation number count value set in step 059AKS064 of Figure 11-17 (step 059AKS071). If the fluctuation count value after the time reduction ends does not match the remaining reservation number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining reservation period end judgment process as it is.

On the other hand, if the variation count value after the time-saving period ends matches the remaining reserved number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining reserved period flag to the off state (step 059AKS072) and clears various count values (step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, the remaining reserved count value and the variation count value after the time-saving period end may be cleared to the initial value of "0", similar to the process of step 059AKS056. After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 sets the left hit instruction command to be sent to instruct the player to return to the so-called left hit, which fires the game ball into the game area on the left side of the player (step 059AKS074), and ends the remaining reserved period end judgment process. The left hit instruction command set in the processing of step 059AKS074 is sent to the performance control board 12, and the left hit instruction is displayed on the performance control board 12 as shown in Figure 11-34 (N-2).

Figure 11-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of Figure 6. In the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 11-19, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the jackpot release post-processing of step S116 shown in Figure 6, when the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7", a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot end performance waiting time, which is the execution period of the ending performance, is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the processing of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed is judged depending on whether the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0"). If the jackpot end performance waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end processing is terminated as it is.

In contrast, if the waiting time for the jackpot end presentation has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322) to determine whether the jackpot type was "non-probability variable", "probability variable", or "sudden probability variable". At this time, it is determined whether the determined jackpot type is "non-probability variable" (step S323).

If the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability variable" in step S323 (step S323; Yes), settings are made to start control to change the game state to a time-saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (e.g., "100") corresponding to the upper limit of the special game that can be executed in the time-saving state to the time-saving count counter. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variable" or "sudden probability variable" (step S323; No), settings are made to start control to change the game state to a probability variable state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to the ON state.

In addition, when the jackpot type is judged to be "high probability", settings may be made to control the state to different types of high probability states when the jackpot type is judged to be "sudden probability". As an example, when the jackpot type is judged to be "high probability", both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time-saving count value is not set, and both the high probability control and the time-saving control are set to continue until the special chart display result is "high probability". On the other hand, when the jackpot type is judged to be "sudden probability", both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time-saving count value is set as in the case of being controlled to the time-saving state, and the high probability control is continued until the special chart display result is "high probability", while the time-saving control is set to continue until the special chart game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, "100"). Alternatively, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden", if a predetermined sudden probability during time-saving flag is on, settings may be made to start time-saving control together with probability variable control, whereas if the sudden probability during time-saving flag is off, settings may be made to start only probability variable control. Here, the sudden probability during time-saving flag may be set to the on state when it is determined that the jackpot flag is on in step S298 shown in FIG. 11-13, for example, in response to the jackpot type being "sudden" and the time-saving flag being on and time-saving control being performed.

After executing either step S324 or S325, the special chart process flag is cleared and initialized to "0" (step S326), and the jackpot end process is terminated.

Next, the processing in the performance control board 12 of the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment will be described. Figure 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a start winning command (start winning port designation command, special reserved memory number designation command, pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) has been received from the main board 11 (step S401).

When it is determined that a start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer (step S402). When the first start winning command or the first special symbol reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (first start winning command, first special symbol reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, and variable pattern determination result designation command) is stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of RAM 122. When the second start winning command or the second special symbol reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (second start winning command, second special symbol reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, and variable pattern determination result designation command) is stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of RAM 122.

Figure 11-21 (A) is an example of the configuration of the first start winning command buffer. The first start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the first start winning. The first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data in a number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved first special charts (for example, 4). Note that, as shown in the figure, the first start winning command buffer in feature part 059AK in this embodiment is provided with an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is stored as reserved display number "0" (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer).

When a start win occurs at the first start win port, a set of four commands (start win command) is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a first start win designation command, a first special symbol reserved memory designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. In addition to the first start win command buffer, a storage area is reserved so that other information can be stored in association with each reserved memory information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the first start winning command buffer in the order of reception. The free area of the first start winning command buffer, i.e., the data in the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when a start winning command is received, the performance control CPU 120 stores each performance control command data in the storage area of the first start winning command buffer corresponding to the smallest reserved display number where all storage areas for start winning commands are "0000 (H)" in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special pattern reserved storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

Figure 11-21 (B) is an example of the configuration of the second start winning command buffer. The second start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the second start winning. The second start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data in a number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved second special charts (for example, 4). As with the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer in feature unit 059AK in this embodiment is provided with an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed is stored as reserved display number "0" as shown in the figure.

When a start win occurs at the second start win port, a set of four commands (start win command) is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a second start win designation command, a second special symbol reserved memory designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. In addition to the second start win command buffer, a storage area is reserved so that other information can be stored in association with each reserved memory information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the second start winning command buffer in the order of reception. The free area of the second start winning command buffer, i.e., the data in the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when a start winning command is received, the performance control CPU 120 stores each performance control command data in the storage area of the second start winning command buffer corresponding to the smallest reserved display number where all the storage areas of the start winning command are "0000 (H)" in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special pattern reserved storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

The second start winning command buffer, like the first start winning command buffer, has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers, and a storage area for storing the display stage change patterns described below. The example shown in Figure 10-8 (B) shows a case where no performance control command data is stored in any of the storage areas for reserved display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 11-20, after executing step S402, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received (step S403). If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high probability flag and high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command (step S404).

The high probability flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (for example, in the performance control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the occurrence of a high probability state, and is switched between on and off in response to the switching of the high probability flag on the main board 11 side between on and off. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (for example, in the performance control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the occurrence of a time-saving state, and is switched between on and off in response to the switching of the time-saving flag on the main board 11 side between on and off. For example, when the game state designation command designates a high probability high base state (for example, when designating that the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are on), the performance control CPU 120 sets both the high probability flag and the high base flag to on (if they are already on, the on state is maintained. The same applies below to the on and off states of both flags). If the game state designation command specifies a high probability low base state (for example, when specifying that the probability variable flag is on and the time-saving flag is off), the high probability flag is set to on and the high base flag is set to off. If the game state designation command specifies a low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set to off.

After executing step S404, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405) and ends the command analysis processing.

Figure 11-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pending display setting process shown in Figure 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a performance control command (starting hole winning designation command, winning judgment result command, pending memory number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of the start winning has been received (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of the start winning by checking whether a starting hole winning designation command, a winning judgment result command, or a pending memory number notification command has been newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the advance notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning time judgment result corresponding to the received winning time judgment result command is identified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "winning time judgment limited" has been identified (step S1303). If the winning time judgment result is other than "winning time judgment limited" (step S1303; No), it is determined whether or not the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning includes a first starting port winning designation command, i.e., whether or not the received starting port winning command is a first starting port winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

If it is a first start winning command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the reserved items stored include a reserve for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss (time saving)", or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "miss" and is a time saving false fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS082). In the processing of step 059AKS082, by checking the contents of the first start winning buffer shown in FIG. 11-21(A), it is possible to judge whether the reserved items include a "jackpot" or a "miss (time saving)", or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "miss" and is a time saving false fluctuation pattern.

If no hold for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or the variable display result is a "miss" and the hold is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, is stored (step 059AKS082; No), the normal hold change determination table shown in Figure 11-23 (A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, if a hold for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or a hold for which the variable display result is a "miss" and a time-saving false fluctuation pattern is stored (step 059AKS082; Yes), the hold change determination table during time limit shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

If it is determined in step 059AKS081 that the command is not the first start hole entry command (step 059AKS081; No), since it is the second start hole entry command and the time-saving state is in progress, the performance control CPU 120 selects the time-saving reserve change determination table for special chart 2 shown in Figure 11-23 (C) as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any one of the processes in steps 059AKS083, 059AKS084, or 059AKS085, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pending display change performance as a pre-reading preview performance and the execution mode according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, in accordance with the determination ratio indicated in the pending display change determination table selected as the table to be used (step S1304).

The normal time reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23(A) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is a first start port winning designation command, and the reserved stored does not include any reserves whose variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss (time saving)", or any reserve whose variable display result is a "miss" and a time saving false fluctuation pattern. As shown in the figure, in the normal time reserve change determination table, the determination ratios are assigned as shown in the figure so that the probability of a jackpot is higher when the variable display result is a "jackpot", when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach miss, or the variable display result is a "small hit", when the variable display result is a "miss (time saving)" or a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a time saving false fluctuation pattern, and in other cases, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the variable display result is executed than when the variable display result is not executed, and the probability of a jackpot is higher in the order of "red" > "green" > "blue" when the variable display result is executed. When the normal hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 11-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table.

The reserve change determination table during the limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is the first start port winning designation command, and the reserved stored contains either a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a variable display result of "miss" and a time-saving false fluctuation pattern. In such a case, after the variable display executed first ends, that is, before the variable display corresponding to the reserved for the pre-reading prediction is executed, the normal state changes to the time-saving state (which may become a probability variable state), so the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern may differ between the time of pre-reading and the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the reserved for the pre-reading prediction. Therefore, the reserve change determination table during the limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) restricts the execution of a reserve display change performance in which the probability of a jackpot is a certain value or more (in this example, "green" or more). In the illustrated example, the reserve display change performance in the form of "blue" can be executed, but it may be set to not be executed. For example, if the variable display result is "miss" in the stored hold and a hold that is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern is stored, the display mode of the hold display to be notified may be initially displayed in "blue", and after the variable display corresponding to the hold of the time-saving false fluctuation pattern ends, the display mode of the hold to be notified (the hold displayed in "blue") may be changed to a hold display of "green" or higher. Also, it may change to a state of "green" or higher as an active display. When the hold change determination table during the limit is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 11-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change performance and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the hold change determination table during the limit.

In addition, in the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23(A) and the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23(B), examples are shown in which the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and the like, is the same as a "jackpot", but for example, there may be a unique state (such as "time?") when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a false time-saving one. This increases the variety of reserve display change presentations, making it possible to attract the player's attention.

The reserve change determination table during time-saving for special chart 2 shown in FIG. 11-23(C) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is a second start port winning designation command. As shown, unlike the reserve change determination table during normal time shown in FIG. 11-23(A) and the reserve change determination table during limit time shown in FIG. 11-23(B), the reserve change determination table during time-saving for special chart 2 does not assign a determination ratio when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "miss" and is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern. When the received start port winning command is a second start port winning designation command and the winning time judgment limit is not in effect, the game state is in a time-saving state (high base control is in effect). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time-saving pattern (special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, the time-saving control is not newly performed, and further, since the return effect described later is performed to indicate whether or not the remaining reserve will be controlled to the time-saving state, there is no need to execute the reserve display change effect that notifies the time-saving state. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2, a determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is "miss" and the time-saving false fluctuation pattern. When the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 11-22, the execution of the reserve display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, after executing the processing of step S1304, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning judgment restriction is in effect (step S1303; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 stores data that identifiably indicates the determination result of step S1304 in the reserve display data storage unit in association with the reserve number corresponding to the new starting winning (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning judgment restriction is in effect, data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 should be stored.

Following the processing of step S1311, the pending display update setting at the time of the start winning is performed (step S1313), and then the advance notice setting processing is terminated. For example, when the number of first special reserved patterns is increased by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, a new first reserved display is added so that the first reserved display in the first reserved display unit 5HR is increased by 1. On the other hand, when the number of second special reserved patterns is increased by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port, a new second reserved display is added so that the second reserved display in the second reserved display unit 5HL is increased by 1. The first reserved display and second reserved display added at this time may be the reserved display determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

Figure 11-24 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of Figure 9. When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time-saving period is in progress (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving period is in progress by checking whether or not a high base flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the performance control flag setting section) is set to the on state.

If the time-saving period is in progress (step 059AKS086; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time-saving period to update the number of time-saving periods (step 059AKS086A). The number of time-saving periods is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 11-30) described later and stored in a specified area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or if it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time-saving period is not in progress (step 059AKS086; No), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a left-hit command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS087), and if it has been received (step 059AKS087; Yes), it displays a left-hit command (see M6 in FIG. 11-34 (N-2)) to instruct the player to hit to the left (step 059AKS088). The left hit instruction display may continue for a period of time from when the left hit instruction command is received until, for example, four variable displays are performed, for five seconds each time. If the left hit instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or if the processing of step 059AKS088 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a right hit instruction command or a simplified mode right hit instruction command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS089).

When either the right hit command or the simplified right hit command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays a right hit command corresponding to the respective command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when a right hit command is received, the right hit command display M3 shown in FIG. 11-33 (F) is displayed, and when a simplified right hit command is received, the right hit command display M3 shown in FIG. 11-35 (O) is displayed. After the right hit command display corresponding to each command is displayed in step 059AKS090, the right hit command display should be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other performances, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (G), in the variable display for each time until the time-saving state ends.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS090, or if it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right hit instruction command nor the simple mode right hit instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, it can be determined whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally by checking the contents of a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122, for example.

If either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is not received correctly (step 059AKS090A; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes missed opportunity processing (step 059AKS090B).

Figure 11-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of Figure 11-24 as the missed-out process. In the missed-out process shown in Figure 11-25, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the variable pattern designation command has been received normally, i.e., whether or not the missed command is a display result designation command (step 059AKS093). If the variable pattern designation command has not been received normally (step 059AKS093; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the missed-out process. In this case, the display does not display the decorative pattern in a variable manner, and the display waits until a pattern determination designation command is sent from the main board 11 with the previous variable display result unchanged, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result designation command is stopped and displayed in accordance with the reception of the pattern determination designation command.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received normally (step 059AKS093; Yes), i.e., if the missed command is a display result designation command, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a confirmed time-saving fluctuation pattern or a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, i.e., whether it is a PB2-4 or PB2-5 fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS094). If it is a confirmed time-saving fluctuation pattern or a false time-saving fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the fluctuation pattern includes a time-saving teasing performance period, the stop symbol setting process described below is performed (step 059AKS095), and the missed-time processing is terminated. In this embodiment, in the characteristic part 059AK, even if the display result designation command is missed, if the variation pattern designation command is received normally, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that confirms time-saving or a variation pattern that falsely indicates time-saving, the stop pattern setting process described below is performed, and the time-saving teasing effect can be executed. However, if either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command is missed, the execution of the time-saving related effects such as the time-saving teasing effect may be prohibited, such as by stopping and displaying a decorative pattern that is determined in advance when the command is missed.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not a time-saving confirmed variation pattern or a time-saving false variation pattern (step 059AKS094; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the final stop pattern (step 059AKS096), and ends the missed-time processing. In step 059AKS096, the combination of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command may be determined to be the combination with the lowest advantage for the player. This can prevent inconsistencies such as a combination of decorative symbols with a high advantage being displayed as a stopped pattern, but actually resulting in a low advantage, and can prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In this case, since the display result designation command has been missed, the performance control board 12 cannot determine whether the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or not. Therefore, after the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (such as a reach effect for a super reach) according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, if the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)," it may display, for example, a decorative pattern of "???" or a swaying display of a predetermined missing pattern until it receives a pattern determination designation command.

Returning to FIG. 11-24, if the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are received normally (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss" or not based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 (step S551). If it is judged that the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss" (step S551; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges, for example, whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern determination result designation command (command stored in the variation pattern determination result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2) corresponding to the "non-reach" case in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not a reach mode (step S552).

If it is determined in the processing of step S552 that it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S552; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of final decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols that make up the non-reach combination (step S553). The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the decorative symbols of the non-reach combination, which are updated by the random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, and determines the final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) by referring to a decorative symbol determination table for non-reach combinations that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

If it is determined in the processing of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S552; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes the stopping pattern setting process (step 059AKS092).

Figure 11-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the stop pattern setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of Figure 11-24. In the stop pattern setting process, the execution settings for the time-saving teasing effect and the return effect are performed, and if the special pattern display result (variable display result) is "miss (time-saving)", the time-saving pattern is processed to be the final stop pattern. Note that the time-saving pattern displayed as a decorative pattern is called the time-saving pattern to distinguish it from the time-saving pattern of the special pattern.

In the stopping pattern setting process in FIG. 11-26, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special pattern display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or a "miss" with a false time-saving fluctuation pattern based on the display result designation command (the command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS101).

If the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a time-saving false (step 059AKS101; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the time is being saved (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, it is sufficient to judge whether or not the time is being saved by checking whether or not the high base flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the performance control flag setting section) of the RAM 122 is set to the on state. If the time is not being saved (step 059AKS102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the losing pattern of the reach combination as the temporary stop pattern (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature section 059AK, if the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the reach performance of the super reach is executed, and then the time-saving teasing performance is executed. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be displayed as a provisional stop as a result of the reach effect of the super reach is determined to be the losing symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, is extracted, and the provisional stop symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) is determined by referring to a decorative symbol determination table for the reach combination that is stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS103, the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion performance setting process to set up the time-saving promotion performance (step 059AKS104).

Figure 11-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of Figure 11-26 as the time-saving prompting performance setting process. In the time-saving prompting performance setting process shown in Figure 11-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines the time-saving prompting performance pattern as shown in Figure 11-28 according to the time-saving type and the fluctuation pattern specified by the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS113), and ends the time-saving prompting performance setting process. Although not shown in Figure 11-28, when the time-saving prompting performance setting process is executed by performing the stop pattern setting process in the missed-out processing in Figure 11-25, if the time-saving prompting performance setting process is executed because the time-saving type is unknown, if it is other than the time-saving false fluctuation pattern, it is sufficient to determine the time-saving prompting performance pattern of the missed-out pattern (for example, the performance pattern of "Success D" with a performance time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 11-28, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B", the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Success A" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time-saving type is "Time-saving C", the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Success B" with a performance time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time-saving type is "Time-saving D", the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Success C" with a performance time of 1 second is determined. When the time-saving fluctuation pattern is a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Failure" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. The performance time corresponds to the time-saving promotional performance period added in step 059AKS013 of FIG. 11-8 (see FIG. 11-9), and the performance control CPU 120 determines the time corresponding to the time-saving promotional performance period as the time-saving promotional performance time based on the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. In the feature part 059AK, the time-saving prompting performance pattern of "Success A" and the time-saving prompting performance pattern of "Failure" have the same performance time, so for example, the same character is displayed, and in "Success A", the time-saving pattern is finally stopped and displayed as a success pattern, while in "Failure", the time-saving pattern is not finally stopped and the decorative pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as a failure pattern. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player as to whether or not the time-saving pattern is successful (whether or not it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the rate at which the variable display result becomes "miss (time-saving)" differs depending on the type of reach performance executed, so that the execution rate of the time-saving prompting performance is also different depending on the type of reach performance executed. That is, for the reach performance of the super reach A, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, the variable display result does not become "miss (time-saving)" and the time-saving prompting performance is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-12(B), for a time-saving false fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is not a "miss (time-saving)" even when a time-saving teasing effect is executed, a reach effect with a low expectation of a jackpot, such as a Super Reach C, is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving teasing effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving teasing effect also varies.

Returning to FIG. 11-26, after executing the processing of step 059AKS104, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the result of the special symbol display is a "miss (time-saving)" or not (step 059AKS105). If the result of the special symbol display is a "miss (time-saving)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time-saving symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and ends the stop symbol setting process. In step 059AKS106, the time-saving symbol of the type corresponding to the time-saving type may be determined as the final stop symbol (see FIG. 11-32 (D-1), FIG. 11-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, if the special symbol display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" but not a time-saving false variation pattern (step 059AKS101; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the variable display of the decorative symbol to be stopped this time is a variable display corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special symbol performed after the time-saving has ended (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, after the number of time-saving times is reduced by 1 in step 059AKS086A in FIG. 11-24 to "0", the flag at the end of time-saving is set to ON, and whether the variable display performed immediately thereafter is a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol can be judged by whether the command to start the variation of the second symbol has been received.

If the variable display (change) corresponds to the first (first) second special chart performed after the time-saving feature has ended (step 059AKS107; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 executes a return performance setting process to execute a return performance indicating whether or not a reserve that results in a "miss (time-saving feature)" special chart display result is stored in the reserve memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart stored after the time-saving feature has ended (step 059AKS108).

Figure 11-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of Figure 11-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in Figure 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that will result in a "miss (time reduction)" special chart display result by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special chart among the effect control command reception buffers provided in RAM 122 (step 059AKS115).

If there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display (step 059AKS115; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets a return success pattern that notifies that there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display, i.e., that the time-saving pattern will be stopped again in one of the remaining reserves (step 059AKS116), and ends the return performance setting process. On the other hand, if there is no reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display (step 059AKS115; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets a return failure pattern that notifies that there is no reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display, i.e., that the time-saving pattern will not be stopped again in one of the remaining reserves (step 059AKS117), and ends the return performance setting process. In feature part 059AK, the return effect for both the successful return pattern and the failed return pattern both execute a common effect (an effect that teases whether or not the time-saving state will be entered again), and as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is different.

Returning to FIG. 11-26, after executing the processing of step 059AKS108, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether or not the pattern of the return performance set in step 059AKS108 is a successful return pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a successful return pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative pattern of a reach combination including a time-saving return pattern is determined as the final stop pattern (step 059AKS110), and the stop pattern setting process is terminated. The time-saving return pattern is a pattern different from the time-saving pattern determined as the final stop pattern in step 059AKS106 according to the time-saving type (see FIG. 11-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, if it is not a successful return pattern (step 059AKS109; No), if it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time-saving mode is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), if it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special chart display result is not a "miss (time-saving mode)" (step 059AKS105; No), or if it is determined in step 059AKS107 that the variable display does not correspond to the first (first) change in the second special chart that occurred after the time-saving mode ended (step 059AKS107; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of confirmed decorative patterns that will be the final stopping patterns that make up the reach combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decorative pattern of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random counter, and determines the final decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the reach combination) by, for example, referring to a decorative pattern determination table for the reach combination that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In this way, even if the special pattern display result is determined to be a "miss (time-saving)" in step 059AKS105 during the stopping pattern setting process, if the time-saving is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), the final stopping pattern of the decorative pattern becomes the decorative pattern of the reach combination through the processing of step 059AKS111.

Returning to FIG. 11-24, after executing the process of step 059AKS092, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs settings for performing the performance during the variable display including the performance of changing the display mode of the active display and the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, such as a mini-game, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern (step S559), and then determines the performance control pattern to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S560). The CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (performance control patterns during special pattern variation) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, for example, and sets it as the pattern to be used. In addition, when it is determined that the time-saving promotion performance or the return performance is to be executed, the performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance or the return performance is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Note that, if it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally in the missed-out processing of step 059AKS090B, it is not necessary to select a performance control pattern. In this case, the decorative pattern is not changed and the previous variable display result remains the same, but the system waits until a pattern determination command is sent from the main board 11, and when the pattern determination command is received, the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable pattern designation command was not received correctly in the missed-out processing of step 059AKS090B, a performance control pattern dedicated to missed-out times may be selected in step S560.

Following the processing of step S560, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance sets an initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) in response to, for example, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command or the performance time when the time-saving promotion performance is executed (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, if the execution setting of the time-saving promotion performance is set in the time-saving promotion performance setting process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 11-26, the initial value of the performance control process timer is set by adding the performance time of the time-saving promotion performance to the time indicated by the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command. After executing step S561, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs settings to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, etc. on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 can start changing the decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (special pattern change performance control pattern) determined in the processing of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123.

After executing the processing of step S562, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during variable display (step S563), and then ends the variable display start setting processing.

Figure 11-30 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of Figure 9. When the variable display performance process shown in Figure 11-30 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer or the like (step S801). The performance control CPU 120 may, for example, update the timer value of the performance control process timer (e.g., subtract 1), and determine that the variable display time has elapsed when an end code is read out from the performance control pattern corresponding to the updated performance control process timer value.

When it is determined in the processing of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time-saving count display period in which the number of time-saving times is displayed (step 059AKS121). The time-saving count display period is the period in which the number of time-saving times updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 11-24 is displayed, and may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that it is the time-saving count display period (step 059AKS121; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving count display control to display the number of time-saving times updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 11-24 as the remaining number of time-saving times (step 059AKS122).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS122, or if it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time-saving count display period (step 059AKS121; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is a reach performance period for executing a reach performance (step 059AKS123). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to a fluctuation pattern. If it is determined that it is a reach performance period (step 059AKS123; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute a reach performance (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or if it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the reach performance period (step 059AKS123; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is the pattern temporary stop timing, which is the timing to temporarily stop and display the decorative pattern (step 059AKS125). The pattern temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined when the temporary stop pattern of the reach combination is determined in the stop pattern setting process of FIG. 11-26 (step 059AKS103). If it is determined that it is the pattern temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs the decorative pattern temporary stop display (step 059AKS126) and causes the decorative pattern of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103 to be temporarily stopped and displayed.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS126, or if it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the timing for the temporary stop of the pattern (step 059AKS125; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a time-saving prompting performance period for executing a time-saving prompting performance (step 059AKS127). The time-saving prompting performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving prompting performance setting processing of FIG. 11-27. If it is determined that it is a time-saving prompting performance period (step 059AKS127; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving prompting performance control for executing a time-saving prompting performance (step 059AKS128).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS128, or if it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not a time-saving teasing performance period (step 059AKS126; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is a return performance period for executing a return performance (step 059AKS129). The return performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return performance setting process of FIG. 11-29. If it is determined that it is a return performance period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs return performance control to execute a return performance (step 059AKS130).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS130, or if it is determined that it is not the return performance period (step 059AKS129; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute performances during variable display, including performances that change the display mode of the active display, mini-games, and other performances during variable display, including variable display operations of decorative patterns, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variable display pattern (step S808), and ends the performance processing during variable display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received normally (step S809). At this time, if the pattern determination command has not been received normally (step 809; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137). If the special chart display result (variable display result) is not a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance processing during variable display.

On the other hand, if the special chart display result (variable display result) is "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the time reduction count to "XXX" as the special time reduction count (step 059AKS138), performs special time reduction count notification control to display "??? times" as the time reduction count notification (059AKS139), and then ends the performance processing during variable display. Note that if the pattern determination command is not received normally, the performance notifying the time reduction count may not be executed. Similarly, even if the command is received normally, for example, if an inconsistency occurs such as a mismatch between the content indicated by the pattern determination command and the content indicated by the display result designation command, the special time reduction count notification control to display "??? times" as the time reduction count notification may be executed, or the performance notifying the time reduction count may not be executed.

If the pattern determination command is received normally in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example by transmitting a specified display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 (step S810). After executing the processing of step 810, the performance control CPU 120 sets the determined pattern display time according to the received pattern determination command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the determined time indicated by commands 8F00 to 8F04 sent and set in step 059AKS043 or step 059AKS044 shown in FIG. 11-15 may be set.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS131, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" or not (step 059AKS132). If the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the number of time reductions (see FIG. 11-15 (B)) specified by the received pattern determination command (step 059AKS133), and performs time reduction number notification control to display the number of time reductions (notify the number of time reductions) (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or if it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special chart display result (variable display result) is not "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a right-hit erase command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS135), and if it has been received (step 059AKS135; Yes), it erases the right-hit instruction display (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or if it is determined in step 059AKS135 that a right-hit erase command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "3", which corresponds to the special chart hit waiting process (step S812), and ends the performance process during variable display.

Figure 11-31 is a timing chart showing the timing of each of the timings during variable display when the time-saving pattern is displayed stationary and in other cases. Figures 11-31 (A) to (C) all show examples of cases where the variable display result is a "miss" (including miss (time-saving)). Specifically, Figure 11-31 (A) shows an example of a case where a time-saving pattern (time-saving type "time-saving A") is displayed stationary as the final decorative pattern, Figure 11-31 (B) shows an example of a case where a time-saving teasing performance is not executed and a time-saving pattern is not displayed stationary as the final decorative pattern, and Figure 11-31 (C) shows an example of a time-saving false variable pattern. In addition, in the illustrated examples, for ease of understanding, all of Figures 11-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which Super Reach C is executed, and Figures 11-31 (A) and (B) show an example in which the PB2-1 fluctuation pattern is selected, while Figure 11-31 (C) shows an example in which the PB2-5 fluctuation pattern is selected.

As shown in FIG. 11-31(A), when the time-saving symbol is displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, when the variable display starts, the game enters a reach state, and then the reach effect of the Super Reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are displayed as temporary stops (in this example, the decorative symbols of 757). Then, the time-saving teasing effect is performed. The time-saving teasing effect period L4 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving teasing effect period L5 shown in FIG. 11-31(C) (see FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-10). After the time-saving teasing effect ends, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the time-saving symbol is displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the decorative symbol combination of 7:7), and the variation ends after the confirmation symbol display period L1 has elapsed. The confirmation symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 11-15(B)).

As shown in Figure 11-31 (B), if the time-saving teasing effect is not executed and the time-saving pattern is not displayed as the final decorative pattern, the variable display starts, the game enters a reach state, and then the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. After that, when the pattern confirmation command is received (767 in this example), the variation ends after the fixed pattern display period L2 has elapsed. Note that the fixed pattern display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see Figure 11-15 (A)), and is the same as the fixed pattern display period L3 shown in Figure 11-31 (C).

As shown in FIG. 11-31(C), when the variable display starts in the case of the time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the state becomes reach, and then the reach performance of the super reach C is executed. Then, when the timing for the pattern to temporarily stop is reached, the decorative pattern of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in the figure (in this example, the decorative pattern of 757). Then, the time-saving teasing performance is performed. The time-saving teasing performance period L5 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving teasing performance period L4 shown in FIG. 11-31(A) (see FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-10). After the time-saving teasing performance ends, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the losing pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern (in this example, 767). Then, after the fixed pattern display period L3 has elapsed, the fluctuation ends. Note that the fixed pattern display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 11-15(A)), and is the same as the fixed pattern display period L2 shown in FIG. 11-31(B).

Next, we will explain examples of the effects and operation when the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state or when a time-saving promotion effect is executed, with reference to Figures 11-32 to 11-35.

As shown in FIG. 11-32(A), when the game state is normal after the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, when the timing for the symbols to be temporarily stopped is reached, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 11-32(B-1). In the illustrated example, a "7" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5La, a "5" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5Ca, and a "7" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5Ra in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. As shown in the figure, the "5" symbol as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed while shaking in a manner that allows the user to visually recognize that it is temporarily stopped. In addition, this is not limited to the decorative symbol 5Ca in each of the "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5C, and all decorative symbols may be displayed while shaking. On the other hand, when the game state is in the time-saving state, since the determination is No in step 059AKS102 in FIG. 11-26, the processing of step 059AKS111 is performed without the decorative symbol of the reach combination being temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-2), the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol. Note that in the illustrated example, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result (the illustrated example shows an example of the special symbol display result of "1", which is the time-saving type of time-saving A), while the decorative symbol shows an example in which the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-2), after the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period.

When the time-saving teasing performance period begins from the state shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-1), the time-saving teasing performance is executed as shown in FIG. 11-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 "Maybe it's time-saving!?" is displayed to tease whether or not the time-saving pattern will be displayed in a static state, but other methods may also be used to tease whether or not the time-saving pattern will be displayed in a static state, for example, depending on whether or not two characters battle and win.

When the pattern determination command is received, the final stop pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-32 (D-1) or (D-2). FIG. 11-32 (D-1) shows an example in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)", the pattern determination command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, and the time-saving pattern 5Cb of the time-saving type "time reduction A" is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern, and the special pattern display result is also an example in which the special pattern display result is a special pattern showing the number "1", which is the time-saving pattern of the time-saving type "time reduction A". Note that in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "green" display mode before the time-saving pattern 5Cb is stopped and displayed, but for example, the display mode may change immediately after the start of the time-saving teasing performance, or may change during the reach performance of the super reach. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the symbol determination command of 8F00 shown in FIG. 11-15(A) is received, and as shown in FIG. 11-32(D-2), the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol. As a special symbol display result, a special symbol showing the symbol "-" which is the losing symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result as shown in the figure. Then, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period. In the example shown in the figure, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "blue" display mode before the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed, but for example, the display mode may change immediately after the start of the time-saving teasing performance, or may change during the reach performance of the super reach. In addition, for the active change performance that changes the display mode of the active display, the display mode of the active display may be changed so that the ratio of the time-saving symbols to be stopped and displayed differs even in the reach performance of the same type of super reach, depending on which display mode the display mode of the active display changes to. In addition, the destination of the change in the display mode in the active change performance may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23(A). Also, unlike the normal reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23(A), when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result is a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, the ratio of the display mode to "green" or "red" may be higher when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)".

In the state shown in FIG. 11-32 (D-1), the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 11-30 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-33 (E), the time-saving count display M2 is performed as the time-saving count notification control. In this case, since the pattern determination command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, "Time-saving 100 times!" is displayed as the time-saving count display M2. When the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 11-30 is executed, "Time-saving ??? times" is displayed as the special time-saving count notification control, and the notification of the time-saving count (time-saving count) may be limited. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the determined pattern display period specified by the pattern determination command of 8F01, has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (F), the time-saving state is controlled and a new variable display (variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL1) is started. At that time, the reserved displays HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. In addition, the processing of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 11-30 displays the time-saving count display M4 of "99 time-saving times remaining" as shown in FIG. 11-33(F). In addition, in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 11-24, the right-hit instruction display M3 is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 11-33(F).

After that, multiple variable displays will be performed in the time-saving state. Figure 11-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed. In the time-saving state, since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, a variable display corresponding to the second special pattern will be performed and a reservation corresponding to the second special pattern will be stored. In the example shown in Figure 11-33 (G), the maximum number of reservation memories corresponding to the second special pattern are stored, which is four, and four reservation displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Also, an example is shown in which the time-saving number display M4 of "19 times remaining" is displayed. Note that the right-hit instruction display in the manner shown in Figure 11-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, and from the second time onwards, as shown in Figure 11-33 (G), it is displayed as a right-hit instruction display M3 in a manner that does not interfere with other performances.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th fluctuation in the time-saving state) is completed after the time-saving symbol is stopped, the time-saving state ends. Figure 11-33 (H) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting a non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed at the 100th variable display after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00, and the time-saving state ends. When the time-saving state ends, a right-hit erase command is received from the main board 11, so the processing of step 059AKS136 shown in Figure 11-30 is performed, and the right-hit instruction display M3 is erased as shown in Figure 11-33 (H). In this state, as shown in the figure, the maximum number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special chart is four, and four reserved displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the remaining reserved period is the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to reserved display HR1 to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4).

Next, when the time-saving state ends and the normal state is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (I), the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR1 starts. Note that the illustrated example shows an example in which the variable display result is a "miss" (an example that is not a "miss (time-saving)"). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the rate at which the special display result is a "miss (time-saving)" in the variable display corresponding to the reserved second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state is high (see FIG. 11-5 (A) and (B)), so there is a high rate of being controlled to the time-saving state again. Therefore, although it is in the normal state during the remaining reserved period, the left-hit instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the instruction displays of the right-hit instruction display and the left-hit instruction display are displayed in succession to prevent the player from being confused. Note that the left-hit instruction display is displayed in the first variable display performed after the remaining reserved period ends, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (N-2).

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special chart performed after the time-saving has ended, and since the execution setting of the return performance is performed in the processing of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 11-26, when the return performance period begins, the return performance is performed as shown in FIG. 11-34 (J). In the return performance, for example, depending on whether or not a specified mission is cleared, a performance may be performed that indicates whether or not a reserve in which the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" is stored (whether or not the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve HR2 to HR4 is "miss (time-saving)"), that is, whether or not the time-saving return pattern is stopped. In the case of a return success pattern, the specified mission is cleared and the time-saving return pattern is stopped, while in the case of a return failure pattern, the specified mission ends in failure, the time-saving return pattern is not stopped, and the combination of decorative patterns that make up the reach is stopped as the final stop. In addition, there may be multiple types of specified missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. In addition, if the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR1 is a "miss (time-saving)", the return effect is not executed because the result is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIG. 11-26, but the return effect may be executed. In this case, the time-saving teaser effect may be executed after the return effect.

When a hold for which the special display result is "miss (time-saving)" is stored, i.e., when it is a successful return pattern, the processing of step 059AKS110 in FIG. 11-26 stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols including the time-saving return symbol 5Cc as the final stop symbol, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (K-1), and notifies the user that there is a hold for which the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" among the stored holds. Note that this example shows the case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to hold display HR4 is "miss (time-saving)" (more specifically, the time-saving type of "time-saving D").

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (L-1), a variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the small time-saving return symbol M5, which allows the player to visually confirm that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc has stopped being displayed, is displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. This provides the player with a sense of security, as it becomes visible that the time-saving symbol is stopped being displayed while there is still reserved time.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR4, since the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR4 is "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type is "time-saving D"), the pattern determination command 8F04 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is received as a pattern determination command, and as shown in FIG. 11-34 (M-1), the time-saving pattern 5Cb for the time-saving type of "time-saving D" is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern. As for the special pattern display result, unlike FIG. 11-32 (D-1), a special pattern showing the number "8" corresponding to the time-saving pattern for the time-saving type of "time-saving D" is displayed as the special pattern display result. Note that the illustrated example shows an example in which the display mode of the active display AHA changes to the display mode of "green" before the time-saving pattern 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 11-34 (M-1), the processing of step 059AKS134 of FIG. 11-30 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-35 (N-1), the time-saving count display M2 is performed as the time-saving count notification control. In this case, since the pattern determination command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, "Time-saving count 20 times!" is displayed as the time-saving count display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the determined pattern display period specified by the pattern determination command of 8F04, has elapsed, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in FIG. 11-35 (O), the time-saving state is controlled and a new variable display (variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL3) is started. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-30, the processing of step 059AKS122 causes the time-saving count display M4 of "Time-saving count remaining 19 times" to be displayed as shown in FIG. 11-35 (O). Also, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 11-24, as shown in FIG. 11-35(O), a simplified right-hit instruction display M3, which is less noticeable than the display shown in FIG. 11-33(F), is displayed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved symbol stored that results in a "miss (time-saving)" special symbol display result, i.e., if it is a return failure pattern, the processing of step 059AKS111 in FIG. 11-26 causes the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination to be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (K-2), and the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (L-2), a variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HR2 is executed. At this time, since it was a return performance of a return failure pattern, unlike FIG. 11-34 (L-1), the time-saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final symbols that make up the non-reach combination, are displayed stopped, and 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00, the fluctuation ends and the remaining reserved period ends. With the remaining reserved period ending, a left-hit instruction command is sent from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 11-18.

When the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL3 is started, the processing of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 11-24 displays the left-hit instruction display M6 of "Return to left-hit!" as shown in FIG. 11-34 (N-2). In this way, the left-hit instruction display is displayed in the next variable display executed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved second special chart (remaining reserved) remaining after the time-saving feature ends.

Figure 11-36 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing in the information output processing performed in the information output processing of step S23 in Figure 5. The processing in the information output processing shown in Figure 11-36 performs processing to output signals such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, etc., which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. When the processing in the information output processing shown in Figure 11-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special chart display result and the normal chart display result as a display signal output processing (step S1801). After executing the processing of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes a drive signal output processing (step S1802) and outputs drive signals for the solenoids 81 and 82.

Then, the CPU 103 executes an external information output process (step S1803), and ends the process in the information output process. In step S1803, various signals are output, such as a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that the time-saving state is in progress (special prize is in progress), a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time-saving state is in progress, and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended.

Figure 11-37 is a timing chart showing the output timing of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of Figure 11-36. Specifically, Figure 11-37 (A) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and Figure 11-37 (B) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the stopping of the time-saving symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-37(A), when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the jackpot pattern has stopped is output, and as a result (when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped), jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output at the same time. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot gaming state, jackpot signal 1 stops being output, but since the time-saving state is entered at that timing, jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern has stopped is output, and if a pattern confirmation signal indicating a jackpot pattern has stopped is output again without the time-saving state ending, jackpot signal 1 is output and jackpot signal 3 stops being output. Note that since this is a jackpot during the time-saving state, the output of jackpot signal 2 continues as shown in the figure. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot gaming state, jackpot signal 1 stops being output, but since the time-saving state is entered at that timing, jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times is completed, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing pattern is output, and the time-saving state ends when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-37(B), when the time-saving state is entered by the stopping of the time-saving pattern, first a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stopping of the time-saving pattern is output, and as a result (when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped), jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are output at the same time. Then, as time passes, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stopping of a losing pattern is output, and when a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stopping of a jackpot pattern is output without the time-saving state ending, jackpot signal 1 is output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, and the output of jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot game state, the output of jackpot signal 1 stops, but at that timing the time-saving state is entered again, so jackpot signal 3 is output. Note that, as shown in the figure, jackpot signal 2 continues to be output. Then, as time passes, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern stop is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy and prevent confusion, and it is possible to suitably identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state with an external device. After that, when the pattern confirmation signal indicating the time-saving pattern stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

In processing step S1240 shown in FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 can determine "Miss (time-shortened)" as the special chart display result regardless of whether the game state is in the time-shortened state or not, and if "Miss (time-shortened)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special chart display result, if the game state is normal, the game state is controlled to the time-shortened state (travel-specific state) in the next special chart game (variable display), whereas if the game state is in the time-shortened state, no control is performed regarding the game state based on the derived display of "Miss (time-shortened)" (no new time-shortened control is performed). In addition, when "Miss (time-saving)" is derived and displayed as the special display result, the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the time-saving pattern as the final stopping pattern of the decorative patterns in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 11-26 in the normal state, while in the time-saving state, stops and displays the final stopping pattern that constitutes the reach combination in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 11-26. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and can increase interest in the game.

As shown in Fig. 11-32 (B-2) and (D-1), the special display result for "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is the same whether the game state is normal or time-saving, but as for the variable display result of the decorative symbols, when the game state is normal, step 059AKS106 in Fig. 11-26 displays the time-saving symbol as the final stopping symbol for the decorative symbols, whereas when the game state is time-saving, step 059AKS111 in Fig. 11-26 displays the final stopping symbol that constitutes the reach combination. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 11-26, the execution setting of the time-saving prompting effect, which prompts whether or not the time-saving pattern indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display is displayed in a stopped state, is performed, so that the performance control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving prompting effect. The performance control CPU 120 executes the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the normal state, and does not execute the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving prompting effect is not executed when the game state is the time-saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, when "Miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special display result, if the CPU 103 is in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 11-15, in the processing of step 059AKS043, it transmits a decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 11-15(B), while if it judges Yes in step 059AKS041, it transmits a decorative pattern stop command with a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. In other words, when "Miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is fixed (fixed time) differs between the normal state and the special state. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the processing of step S1240 shown in FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 can determine "Miss (time-shortened)" as the special chart display result regardless of whether the game state is in the time-shortened state or not, and when "Miss (time-shortened)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special chart display result, if it is in the normal state, the next special chart game (variable display) is controlled to the time-shortened state (travel-specific state), while if it is in the time-shortened state, no control is performed regarding the game state based on the derived display of "Miss (time-shortened)" (no new time-shortened control is performed). And, as shown in FIG. 11-5, between the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, determination data is assigned so that there is a higher probability that the special chart display result will be determined to be "Miss (time-shortened)" and controlled to the time-shortened state from the next variable display in the second special chart display result determination table. In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a return performance based on whether or not a "miss (time-saving)" reservation is stored among the reservations stored at the end of the time-saving state by processing step 059AKS108 in FIG. 11-26. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can display a right-hit instruction by processing step 059AKS090 in FIG. 11-24, and does not display a left-hit instruction until it receives a left-hit instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 11-18, that is, until all variable displays corresponding to the reservations (remaining reservations) of the second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state are completed. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, by receiving a left hit instruction command in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 can display a left hit instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 11-24. The left hit instruction command is then transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 11-18, that is, when all variable displays corresponding to the reserved second special charts stored at the time of the end of the time-saving state are completed. After receiving the left hit instruction command, that is, in the variable display that is performed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved charts are completed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a left hit instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 11-24. This allows for an appropriate launch notification, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

The CPU 103 also transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 11-16. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-hit instruction in a manner corresponding to the received command in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 11-24. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and losing interest in the game.

In the return performance, for example, depending on whether a specified mission is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 indicates whether a reserve is stored that will result in a "miss (time-saving)" special chart display result (whether the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserves HR2 to HR4 will be "miss (time-saving)"), i.e., whether the time-saving return pattern will be stopped or not. There are return performances for successful return patterns and return performances for unsuccessful return patterns, and both execute a common performance (for example, a performance that aims to clear a specified mission to see whether the time-saving state will be entered again), and as a result, the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether the specified mission is cleared. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention after the common performance is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-7, when the variable display result of the remaining reserved is "miss (time-saving)", the CPU 103 determines the time-saving type to be "time-saving C" or "time-saving D". Then, in the processing of step 059AKS113 of FIG. 11-27, the presentation control CPU 120 determines the time-saving promotion presentation pattern to execute different patterns of time-saving promotion presentations depending on the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 11-28. That is, different patterns of time-saving promotion presentations are executed for the time-saving promotion presentation executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special chart in the normal state is "miss (time-saving)", and the time-saving promotion presentation executed when the variable display result corresponding to the second special chart of the remaining reserved is "miss (time-saving)". This allows different patterns of presentation to be executed depending on the situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, the CPU 103 transmits a right-hit erase command in the variable display of the time-saving end round by processing step 059AKS066 in FIG. 11-17. Then, at the end of the variable display of the time-saving end round, the performance control CPU 120 erases the right-hit instruction display by processing step 059AKS136 in FIG. 11-30 based on the command. Therefore, the right-hit instruction display is erased during the remaining reserved period. Also, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 11-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed), a right-hit instruction display in a manner corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 11-24. This allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

The CPU 103 can also output various signals, such as jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that a time-saving state (special prize is occurring), jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is occurring, and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended, to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by processing step S1803 in FIG. 11-36. When the time-saving state is entered due to the time-saving pattern stopping, a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the time-saving pattern has stopped is output, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), and a jackpot signal is output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped. This allows the external device to conveniently identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

As shown in FIG. 11-37(B), the CPU 103 stops outputting the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same time that the output of the symbol determination signal corresponding to the end of the time-saving state stops. This allows the external device to conveniently identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

Also, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern according to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) (when the time-saving start flag is on and the miss variation pattern determination table is selected), no determination value is assigned to the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation, and the determination value is assigned so that the rate of "miss (time-saving)" varies depending on the type of super reach executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 11-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed), a right-hit instruction display in a manner corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 11-24. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

As shown in Figures 11-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, a decision value is assigned to result in multiple variable display results, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or simply a miss. This increases the variety of performance results, enhancing the interest in the game.

The CPU 103 also transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special chart display result (variable display result), and the performance control CPU 120 performs a performance based on these commands. For example, even if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is a variation pattern for performing a reach performance of Super Reach B based on the received variation pattern designation command and determines No in step S552 of FIG. 11-24, whether or not to execute the processing of step 059AKS104 or step 059AKS106 is different depending on whether or not it determines Yes in 059AKS101 of FIG. 11-26 based on the display result designation command. In other words, even if a variation pattern command with a common performance content, such as performing a reach performance of Super Reach B or Super Reach C, is received, a different performance is performed depending on the content of the display result designation command. This increases the variety of performance results and improves the interest in the game.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 11-26, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving prompting effect by setting the execution of a time-saving prompting effect (special effect) that prompts whether or not a time-saving pattern, which indicates that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be displayed in a stopped state. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving prompting effect after executing a reach effect that is common whether or not the time-saving prompting effect is executed. This executes a special effect, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-12, since the rate at which the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, the execution rate of time-saving teasing effects also differs depending on the type of reach effect executed. This makes it possible to prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-12(B), for a time-saving false variable pattern in which the variable display result is not a "miss (time-saving)" even when a time-saving teasing effect is executed, a reach effect with a low expectation of a jackpot, such as a Super Reach C, is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving teasing effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving teasing effect also varies. This makes it possible to prevent the special effect from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

The performance control CPU 120 also changes the display mode of the active display so that the rate at which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed varies even for the same type of Super Reach reach performance, depending on which display mode the active display is changed to. This makes it possible to prevent special performances from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

The CPU 103 also transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special chart display result (variable display result), and the performance control CPU 120 performs a performance based on these commands. For example, even if the contents of the received display result designation command are different, the performance control CPU 120 executes a common Super Reach B reach performance regardless of the special chart display result (variable display result) if the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that performs a Super Reach B reach performance. This allows the performance to be executed optimally.

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the number of times the time is reduced by controlling the time-saving state varies depending on the type of time-saving, and as shown in FIG. 11-12, the proportion of super reach effects that are executed varies depending on the type of time-saving. As shown in FIG. 11-28, the pattern of time-saving teasing effects that are executed varies depending on the type of time-saving. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention, as the number of times the time is reduced afterwards varies depending on the effect that is executed.

The CPU 103 also transmits a display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 11-8, and sets up the transmission of a decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 11-15. The performance control CPU 120 performs the stop symbol setting process in FIG. 11-26 to set up the execution of the performance based on the contents of the received display result designation command, and sets the number of time-saving times specified by the received symbol determination command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 11-30. This allows for optimal performance control.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 11-24, the presentation control CPU 120 checks the contents of the presentation control command receiving buffer provided in RAM 122 to determine whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally, and if they have not been received normally, executes the missed-out processing shown in FIG. 11-25, and if either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command has been missed, prohibits the execution of presentations related to time-saving, such as time-saving teasing presentations, by stopping and displaying a decorative pattern that is predetermined for missed events. This makes it possible to execute presentations appropriately while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation determines that the command was not received normally in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 11-24, it can execute a presentation related to the time-saving state, such as a time-saving teaser presentation, by executing the stop symbol setting process in step 059AKS095 in FIG. 11-25 if it determines that the command was not received normally and the pattern specified by the pattern specification command is a pattern indicating a confirmed time-saving state or a pattern indicating a false time-saving state. This makes it possible to execute the presentation appropriately while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The presentation control CPU 120 also determines the number of time-saving times based on the received symbol determination command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 11-30. If the symbol determination command is not received correctly, the process of step 059AKS139 performs special time-saving number notification control, which displays "??? times" as a notification of the number of time-saving times, thereby restricting the execution of the time-saving number notification. This makes it possible to execute presentations in an optimal manner while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a reserve display change presentation in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-22. If the reserve memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "false time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table at the time of limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is selected and a reserve display change presentation is executed. In other words, if the reserve memory currently stored contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)", the execution of the reserve display change presentation is restricted. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in step 059AKS082, if the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "false time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is selected and the reserve display change presentation is executed. Therefore, even if the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", the reserve change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is selected to restrict the execution of the reserve display change presentation, just as in the case where the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)". This makes it possible to suppress the deviation in presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the currently stored reserved memory in step 059AKS082 contains a reserved memory with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserved memory with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserved memory with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, the reserved display change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is selected and the reserved display change presentation is executed, so that the execution of the reserved display change presentation is also restricted if the currently stored reserved memory contains a reserved memory with a variable display result of "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a presentation related to a state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 11-23(B), when the hold display change presentation is restricted, the presentation control CPU 120 does not execute the hold display change presentation, or if it does execute it, executes a hold display change presentation with a "blue" display state. In other words, it does not execute a hold display change presentation that indicates a higher expectation level than the "green" display state. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute hold display change effects that change the display state to "green" or "red." This restricts the execution of certain types of advance notice effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game from being felt without giving the player unnecessary expectations.

(Modification of characteristic part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-5, an example was shown in which the time-saving pattern as a result of the special pattern display is a part of the "miss", but this is just one example. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-38, a part of the small win pattern may be a time-saving pattern. In this case, the time-saving control is performed after the end of the small win game state, and a right-hit instruction display or the like is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small win game state. Also, as in the above embodiment, even if a small win pattern, which is a time-saving pattern, is stopped and displayed again in the special pattern game in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is not newly controlled, and the performance control CPU 120 simply stops and displays a combination of decorative patterns that constitute a small win, rather than a small win pattern including a time-saving pattern.

In the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations are completed, a left hit instruction command is sent in the processing of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 11-18, and the performance control CPU 120 displays a left hit instruction display in the first variable display that is displayed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations are completed. In addition to this, for example, the left hit instruction display may have a first mode that is noticeable to the player and a second mode that is not noticeable to the player, and the second mode of the left hit instruction display may be displayed in the first variable display that is displayed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations are completed. The left hit instruction display is displayed for 5 seconds each time from the time the left hit instruction command is received until, for example, four variable displays are displayed, but it may change from the second mode to the first mode over time. In addition, the left hit instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound or the lighting of a lamp (i.e., it may be a left hit notification that notifies the player of a left hit). For example, in the first mode, the other output sounds are muted and a sound announcing a left hit is output, while in the second mode, the sound announcing a left hit is output without muting the other output sounds.

In the above embodiment, the return effect is performed when the variable display (change) corresponding to the first (first) second special chart performed after the time-saving period ends, but this is just one example. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the time-saving period ends, and for example, depending on which reserved memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart stored after the time-saving period ends becomes a "miss (time-saving)", the timing of one of the first to third variable displays performed after the time-saving period ends may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, the return effect may be performed multiple times over multiple variable displays until a successful pattern is achieved, such as a pattern in which the return effect of a return failure pattern is switched to a return success pattern after the execution of a return effect of a return failure pattern, or a return effect of a return success pattern is performed in the next variable display after the execution of a return effect of a return failure pattern.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect differs depending on the type of time-saving effect, that is, the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect differs when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during normal state is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type A or B), but this is just one example. The pattern of the time-saving teasing effect may be the same when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result of the first special chart during normal state is a "miss (time-saving)".

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-15, an example was shown in which the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed (confirmation time) is different between when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B), but this is just one example. The confirmation time may be the same between when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

For example, the confirmation time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is "miss (time-saving)" may be the same as when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is "miss (time-saving)." In this way, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time-saving state, the player can be clearly notified that the time-saving state will be entered.

In addition, examples have been shown (Fig. 11-35 (N-1), Fig. 11-33 (E)) in which the number of time-saving times is notified in a common manner at the determined time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving types C and D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving types A and B), but these may be in different manners.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the right-hit instruction display is erased after the time-saving state ends, and the right-hit instruction display is not displayed during the remaining reserved period, but this is just one example. The right-hit instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound or the lighting of a lamp (i.e., it is sufficient as long as it is a right-hit notification that notifies of a right hit), and during the remaining reserved period, no display or sound output is made on the image display device 5, and for example, the right-hit lamp indicating a right hit may be lit.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-37(B), when the last variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern stop is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so an example was shown in which the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at that timing, but this is just one example. For example, since the variable display result corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) of the second special pattern stored at the time of the time-saving end has a high probability of being "miss (time-saving)", even if the time-saving state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining reserved ends. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. This allows the external device to suitably identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a time-saving teasing effect is performed after the reach effect of a super reach, and an example is shown in which it is suggested whether or not the time-saving pattern will stop, but this is just one example. For example, the results of the reach effect may be displayed as a big win (including a small win), the time-saving pattern stopping, or a miss. This increases the variety of the results of the reach effect execution, improving interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a time-saving teasing performance period is added to the variable pattern when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)". In addition, for example, a variable display result of "revival jackpot" can be provided, and the same variable pattern as when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" can be selected, and the revival performance period executed after the reach performance can be added (for example, 20 seconds), and the symbols that constitute the jackpot (special symbols and corresponding decorative symbols) can be stopped and displayed after the revival performance. This increases the variety of performances and improves the interest in the game. Also, when the variable display result is a "revival jackpot", a process of adding the revival performance period can be executed after step S262 in FIG. 11-8, and the variety of performances can be increased with simple processing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a super reach reach effect is used to tease whether the variable display result will be a jackpot, and then a time-saving teasing effect is used to tease whether a time-saving pattern will be displayed in a stopped state. However, in addition to this, for example, in the time-saving teasing effect, in addition to whether a time-saving pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, it is also possible to notify that there will be an advantage greater than the time saving effect, such as whether a jackpot pattern will be displayed in a stopped state. This makes it possible to maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

In the above embodiment, if the pattern determination command is not received normally in step S809 and step 059AKS137 in FIG. 11-30 and the special pattern display result (variable display result) is a pattern determination command for "miss (time reduction)", an example was shown in which the notification of the number of time reductions is restricted by performing special time reduction number notification control to display "??? times" as a notification of the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139. However, for example, even if special time reduction number notification control is performed, the player may be able to specify the number of time reductions to some extent by changing the background image according to the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the main board 11 may transmit a background designation command according to the remaining number of time reductions, and the performance control board 12 may display a background image specified by the received background designation command. This allows the player to specify the number of time reductions to some extent by the background image, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, each time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 may transmit a time-saving number designation command indicating the remaining number of time-saving times, and the performance control board 12 may notify the remaining number of time-saving times in response to the time-saving number designation command. This allows the player to identify the remaining number of time-saving times even when special time-saving number notification control is performed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Also, for example, if the number of time-saving times is 100, a special variation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when 50 times remain, and the performance control board 12 may notify the remaining number of time-saving times of 50 times in response to receiving the special variation pattern. This allows the player to identify the remaining number of time-saving times even when special time-saving number notification control is performed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when the currently stored reserve memory in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 11-22 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, an example is shown in which the reserve change decision table during limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is selected and the reserve display change presentation is executed; that is, when the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)" or a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", an example is shown in which the common reserve change decision table during limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is selected and the execution of the reserve display change presentation is restricted, but this is just one example. When the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)" and a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", different reserve change decision tables during limit may be selected to restrict the execution of the reserve display change presentation. For example, one may execute a pre-reading preview of the reserved display change performance, and the other may execute a pre-reading preview of the dialogue. In this case, it is sufficient to execute a type of performance with a low expectation in both cases. Also, if a reserved display whose variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" is stored in the currently stored reserved memory, the reserved display change performance may not be executed, and if a reserved display whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored, the execution or non-execution of the reserved change performance may be determined based on the reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) such that the display state is not "green" or higher.

In the above embodiment, when the reserve memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 in FIG. 11-22 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 11-23(B) is selected, and an example is shown in which the reserve display change performance with an expectation level of "green" or higher is not executed, but this is just one example. For example, in addition to the reserve display change performance, multiple types of pre-reading preview performances such as a dialogue preview and a pre-reading zone preview may be executed as the pre-reading preview performance, and if the judgment is Yes in step 059AKS082 in FIG. 11-22, the pre-reading preview performance of the pre-reading zone preview type may not be executed. This prevents the player's attention from being distracted from the reserve stored before the pre-reading preview target.

In the above embodiment, the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are made of 7-segment LEDs, and the special patterns are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" to "9" and "-", but this is just one example. The first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B may be made of eight LEDs, as shown in FIG. 11-39, for example, and the special patterns may be represented by a combination of the lighting of these eight LEDs. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is a "big win" or a "small win", it may be represented by the lighting of three of the eight LEDs, and when the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)" or a "miss", it may be represented by the lighting of two LEDs.

In the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 11-34(L-1), the time-saving pattern 5Cb of the time-saving type "time-saving D" is displayed as the final stop pattern in the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-34(M-1), but this is just one example. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40, after the state shown in FIG. 11-40(L-1) (similar to FIG. 11-34(L-1)), a time-saving return small pattern M5 is displayed to visually confirm that the time-saving return pattern 5Cc has stopped, and since it has already been notified that the time-saving pattern will stop during the remaining reserved period, as shown in FIG. 11-40(M-3), the variable display of the decorative pattern may be reduced and displayed (reduced pattern M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether the time-saving pattern has stopped or not, may be displayed large in the center of the image display device 5. This adds a sense of excitement to the game and improves the interest in the game. In addition, since it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining reserved period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining reserved period. Restrictions may include not executing it at all, executing it in a mode with low expectations, or executing it in an inconspicuous mode, such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 059AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when the determination is Yes in step 059AKS006, the processing of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the performance execution means is capable of executing different performances in the normal state and in the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS092, etc.),
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of the first special chart and the second special chart or variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B-2) and (D-1), when the game state is in the normal state and when the time-saving state, the special display result as "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is a common display result (special display result showing the number "1", which is the time-saving pattern of the time-saving type of "time-saving A")), and the performance identification information different to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, for the variable display result of the decorative pattern, when the game state is in the normal state, in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 11-26, the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern of the decorative pattern, while when the time-saving state is in the time-saving state, in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 11-26, the final stop pattern constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed), etc.
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the effect execution means is in the normal state, it is capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the special display result will be displayed as the variable display result (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 judges No in step 059AKS102, it is capable of executing the processing of step 059AKS104), and when the effect execution means is in the special state, it does not execute the special effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 judges Yes in step 059AKS102, it does not execute the processing of step 059AKS104).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed until when it is determined to be fixed differs between when the normal state is in effect and when the special state is in effect (for example, when the normal state is in effect, a decorative pattern stop command with the determined time shown in FIG. 11-15(B) is transmitted in the processing of step 059AKS043, whereas when it is determined to be Yes in step 059AKS041, a decorative pattern stop command with a determined time of 0.5 seconds is transmitted, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 060AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 060AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when the determination is Yes in step 059AKS006, the processing of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
As the variable display, a first identification information and a second identification information are variable displayed, and a performance identification information is variable displayed in response to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the variable display result of the second identification information has a higher probability of displaying the special display result than the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, between the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, determination data is assigned such that the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be "miss (time-saving)" and that the next variable display will be controlled to the time-saving state is higher, etc.).
The performance execution means includes:
A different effect can be executed depending on whether or not the information related to the variable display stored at the time of the end of the special state includes information that the variable display result is the special display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
During control in the special state, a notification is made to launch the game medium to a specific path in the game area (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS090), and when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information whose variable display result is the special display result and when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state does not include information whose variable display result is the special display result, a notification is not made to launch the game medium to a normal path different from the specific path until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed (for example, when a right-hit instruction display is possible by the processing of step 059AKS090, a left-hit instruction display is not performed until a left-hit instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, i.e., until all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation of the second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state are completed).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means includes:
In a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, a notification is made that the game medium should be launched along the normal path (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088, etc.),
At the end of the special state, a notification is made in the variable display of the first identification information that is executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored in memory has ended, to notify the player that the gaming medium should be released along the normal path (e.g., in the variable display executed after the left hit instruction command is received, i.e., after the variable display corresponding to the remaining reserve has ended, a left hit instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above,
The presentation execution means displays different notification modes for informing the player that the game medium should be launched along the specific path during control of the special state between a case where the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and a case where the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, a right-hit instruction display is displayed in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent players from feeling annoyed and losing interest in the game.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means executes a common effect and then executes a different effect in the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, depending on whether the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information whose variable display result is the special display result or not (for example, the return effect includes a return effect for a successful return pattern and a return effect for a failed return pattern, both of which execute a common effect (for example, an effect aimed at clearing a specified mission), and as a result, the combination of decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state differs depending on whether the specified mission is cleared or not).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to attract the player's attention after the common performance is executed.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means performs different effects when controlled in the special state between a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, the pattern of the time-saving promotion effect performed according to the time-saving type is different as shown in FIG. 11-28 ).
This may be done.

This configuration allows different patterns of presentation to be executed depending on the situation, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The display time of the special display result is common when the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, the determination time is common when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is “miss (time reduction)” (time reduction type of time reduction C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is “miss (time reduction)” (time reduction type of time reduction A or B)).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the amount of control data from increasing.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means includes:
During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, no notification is made that the game medium should be released along the specific path (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS136),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification is made that the game medium should be shot along the specific path (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS090).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
A first signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
A second signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled to the special state (e.g., a CPU 103 outputting a big win signal 3, etc.);
A fourth signal output means (such as the CPU 103 that outputs a symbol determination signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to the end of the variable display,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means at the end of the variable display, and the third signal is output by the third signal output means (for example, when a time-saving state is entered due to the stop of a time-saving pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-37(B), a pattern determination signal indicating the stop of the time-saving pattern is output, and a jackpot signal is output at the timing when the output of the pattern determination signal is stopped, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
A first signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
A second signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
and a third signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled to the special state,
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state ends (e.g., even if the time-saving state ends, the output of the big win signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation ends),
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
The second signal and the third signal are stopped from being output at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol determination signal corresponding to the end of the time-saving state is stopped, the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 061AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 061AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
When a special display result (such as a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, executes the processing of step 059AKS025, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed when the variable display result is the specific display result and when the variable display result is the special display result (for example, a plurality of types of reach effects can be executed, etc.),
The rate at which the special display result is obtained varies depending on which of the multiple types of specific effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the rate at which the result is a "miss (time reduction)" varies depending on the type of super reach),
During control in the special state, a notification is made that the gaming medium should be launched along a specific path in the gaming area, and a notification is started in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed that the gaming medium should be launched along the specific path (for example, a right-hit instruction display is made in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of common specific effects in cases where the variable display result becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, as shown in Figs. 11-11 and 11-12, when a reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, a decision value is assigned to result in a plurality of variable display results, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or a simple miss).
This may be done.

This configuration increases the variety of presentation results and improves the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a common variable display pattern in cases where the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, it is capable of determining a variable display pattern that performs a super reach B or a super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
The presentation identification information is variably displayed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, by executing the processes of steps S171 and S172).
When the effect execution means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect execution means executes different effects depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, even if the result of the determination in step S552 is No, different effects are executed depending on whether the result of the determination in 059AKS101 is Yes or No).
This may be done.

This configuration increases the variety of presentation results and improves the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect (for example, a time-saving teasing effect can be executed after executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.),
This may be done.

With this configuration, special effects can be implemented, increasing the interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and whether or not the special effect will be executed varies depending on the type of the specific effect (for example, the rate at which a time-saving incentive effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, etc.),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect that suggests whether or not the special display result will occur after executing the specific effect, and the rate at which the special display result will occur when the special effect is executed varies depending on the type of the specific effect (for example, the rate at which a time-saving hinting effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving hinting effect also varies).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to further execute a predetermined effect (such as an effect that changes the display mode of the active display) different from the specific effect,
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined performance, the rate at which the special display result is obtained when the specific performance is executed varies (for example, depending on which display mode the active display changes to, the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed varies even in the same type of reach performance of the super reach, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and is capable of executing an effect notifying the specific display result after executing the special effect (for example, in a time-saving teasing effect, in addition to whether or not a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the advantage will be greater than or equal to the time-saving effect, such as whether or not a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed).
This may be done.

This configuration helps maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a common variable display pattern in cases where the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, it is capable of determining a variable display pattern that performs a super reach B or a super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
In the variable display of the identification information, a variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process of step 059AKS013, etc.),
In the variable display of the performance identification information, a variable display time of the performance identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step S561, etc.),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the performance execution means can execute a common performance if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command that indicates the common variable display pattern (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a reach performance of Super Reach B even when the content indicated by the display result designation command is different).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal performance.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "Time-saving A" to "Time-saving D"),
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
The effect execution means is capable of executing different types of effects in the variable display that becomes the special display result according to the type of the special display result (for example, the execution rate of Super Reach C is higher for the time-saving type "time-saving B" than for the time-saving type "time-saving A", and the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect executed according to the time-saving type is different, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the number of times the time is reduced varies depending on the performance that is executed, which can attract the player's attention.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "Time-saving A" to "Time-saving D"),
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
A first command indicating the number of times a variable display is executed during control in the special state can be transmitted, and a second command different from the first command can be transmitted after the first command is transmitted (for example, CPU 103 transmitting a display result designation command in step S268 and setting the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step S059AKS021, etc.).
The performance execution means determines the performance during the variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of times of the variable display to be executed during control in the special state based on the received second command (for example, executes a performance according to the content of the display result designation command, and sets the number of times of time reduction specified by the received pattern determination command in step 059AKS133, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal performance control.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The performance execution means executes a performance based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means, and when either one of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command cannot be normally received, restricts the execution of the performance related to the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above,
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The performance execution means includes:
Executing a performance based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the process of step S171, etc.);
In the case where the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result is not normally received, if the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern, a performance related to the special state can be executed (for example, the processing of step 059AKS095 can be executed).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
There are multiple types of special display results,
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
A first command indicating the number of times a variable display is executed during control in the special state can be transmitted, and a second command different from the first command can be transmitted after the first command is transmitted (for example, CPU 103 transmitting a display result designation command in step S268 and setting the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step S059AKS021, etc.).
The performance execution means determines a performance during variable display based on the received first command, notifies the number of variable display times to be executed during control in the special state based on the received second command, and limits the notification of the number of variable display times to be executed during control in the special state if the second command is not normally received (e.g., performance control CPU 120 executing the process of step 059AKS139, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 062AK)
Feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 062AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command, etc.) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed, etc.).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means includes:
When new judgment result information is received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the newly received judgment result information is further restricted (for example, when a reserve in which the variable display result is "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored reserve memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
During the restriction of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance can be executed in the same manner as the look-ahead performance that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, by executing the processes of steps S059AKS084 and S1304),
This may be done.

This configuration can reduce misalignment of presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is newly received after the determination result information indicating that a suggestive performance suggesting whether or not the game will be controlled to the special state is to be executed is received, the execution of the look-ahead performance based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted (for example, when a hold for executing a time-saving teasing performance is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
During the restriction of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance can be executed in a manner similar to the look-ahead performance that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, by executing the processes of steps S059AKS084 and S1304).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a state transition effect is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance execution means does not execute the pre-reading performance in a manner indicating that the degree of advantage controlled to the advantageous state is equal to or greater than a specific degree of advantage during the restriction of the pre-reading performance (for example, does not execute a pending display change performance of "green" or greater as shown in FIG. 11-23(B) ),
This may be done.

This configuration can reduce misalignment of presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The performance execution means does not execute a specific type of the look-ahead performance during the restriction of the look-ahead performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), when the hold display change performance is restricted, does not execute a hold display change performance of a type that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red");
This may be done.

This configuration limits the execution of certain types of preview effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player unnecessary expectations.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 063AK)
The following describes the characteristic part 063AK according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the game area 2 formed on the surface of the game board is provided with a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top of the image display device 5, and a right game area 063AK2 on the right side of the top of the image display device 5. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be divided, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the nail arrangement PL inside the game area 2. When a game ball (game medium) is launched from a ball launching device and shot into the game area 2 and guided to the left game area 063AK1, it is impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area 063AK2 by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example. Also, when a game ball is launched from a ball launching device and shot into the game area 2 and guided to the right game area 063AK2, it is impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area 063AK1 by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example.

The left play area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning port 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right play area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning opening 10 is kept in a constant open state by a specified ball receiving member so that game balls can always enter. When a game ball enters (enters) the general winning opening 10, a specified number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning port that is always kept in a constant open state where a game ball can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning port, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special game, can be established. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a large winning opening door 063AK3 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door (for special electric device), and has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state (first state) where it is easy for game balls to win and a closed state (second state) where it is impossible or difficult for game balls to win, by the large winning opening door 063AK3. FIG. 12-2 shows the state in which the large winning opening door 063AK3 has closed the large winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door 063AK3 closes the large winning opening 063AK4, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to win in the large winning opening 063AK4. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the on state, the large winning opening door 063AK3 opens the large winning opening 063AK4, making it easy for the game ball to win in the large winning opening 063AK4. When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 063AK4, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

The special variable winning ball device 7 controls the large winning hole 063AK4 to be open in a predetermined manner when the large winning pattern (specific display result) is derived (stopped) as a fixed special pattern in the special game, the variable display result becomes "large winning", and the large winning game state (advantageous state) is controlled. The open state continues until the timing of the passage of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning hole 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment), whichever comes first. A cycle in which the large winning hole 063AK4 is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the large winning game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times in this embodiment) is reached.

In addition, the large prize opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to an open state in a predetermined manner when a small prize pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in a special game, the display result of the variable display becomes a "small prize", and the small prize game state is controlled. Specifically, in the small prize game state, the large prize opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is repeatedly opened and closed. For example, in the small prize game state, an open state of 0.1 seconds and a closed state of 1.0 seconds are repeatedly performed. The action of repeatedly opening and closing the large prize opening 063AK4 is also called opening and closing the large prize opening. The opening and closing of the large prize opening ends when one of the following conditions is met: the 0.1 second open state is repeated a predetermined maximum number of times (10 times in this embodiment), or game balls enter the large prize opening 063AK4 up to a predetermined maximum number of winning balls (10 in this embodiment).

In the characteristic section 063AK, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter referred to as "left hit") in which the game ball is shot into the left game area 063AK1, aiming to win in the general winning port 10 or the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, while in the time-saving state (low probability high base state), the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter referred to as "right hit") in which the game ball is shot into the right game area 063AK2, aiming to win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured so that when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state, the player can aim to win in the big win opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball to the right.

Feature 063AK performs a right-hit promotion effect to encourage the player to hit to the right during periods when the game is controlled to the time-saving state, big win game state, or small win game state, in which right-hitting is advantageous.

A game ball that enters the large prize opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable prize ball device 7 passes through (enters) the large prize opening switch 063AK5, is detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that falls into the recess 063AK6 is guided rearward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage opening 063AK7. Behind the passage opening 063AK7, there is a distribution section supply path 063AK8 that extends downward to the left, and a discharge path 063AK9 that extends downward to the right.

In the big win game state, all game balls that enter the big win opening 063AK4 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the small win game state, only one game ball among the game balls that enter the big win opening 063AK4 flows down through the distribution section supply path 063AK8 to the distribution section 063AK18 described below, and all game balls other than that one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

Figures 12-3(a) to 12-3(c) show the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the characteristic part 063AK, as seen from the arrow I-I in Figure 12-2. As shown in Figure 12-3(a), the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a roughly L-shaped rotating piece 063AK10 and a distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 that moves the plunger 063AK11 left and right by switching between an on state and an off state. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting protrusion 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching between the on state and the off state of the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12.

As shown in FIG. 12-3(a), when the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the on state, the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Also, the bottom surface of the sorting section supply path 063AK8 is at a lower position (located lower) than the bottom surface of the discharge path 063AK9. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-3(a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passage opening 063AK7 falls into the sorting section supply path 063AK8 and its movement is restricted by the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. The game ball A2, which passed through 063AK7 following the game ball A1, is blocked by the game ball A1 and cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8, so changes direction to the right as shown in FIG. 12-3(b). The game ball A2 continues to flow down the discharge path 063AK9. The discharge path 063AK9 is provided with a discharge count switch 063AK16, and the game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled from the on state to the off state while the rotating piece 063AK10 is holding the game ball A1, the plunger 063AK11 pops out from the main body of the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12, as shown in FIG. 12-3(c). This causes the rotating piece 063AK10 to rotate about the pivot 063AK14, flicking the game ball A1 toward the sorting section supply path 063AK8. The flicked game ball A1 flows down the sorting section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(a), the game ball A3 that flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 passes through the distribution section passing switch 063AK17, and after being detected by the distribution section passing switch 063AK17, enters the distribution section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game balls that flow down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and causes them to pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area), the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area), or the loss area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are all areas (components) that are configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are provided below the distribution section 063AK18.

The game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passage switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passage switch 063AK22, and is then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown). The game ball that is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path is detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special game, a small win symbol is derived and displayed, and the game is controlled to a small win game state. When the large win opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, the game ball that entered the large win opening 063AK4 passes through the large win area 063AK19, and the game is controlled to a large win game state after the small win game state ends.

The game ball that enters the time-saving area 063AK20 passes through the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23, is detected by the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23, and is then discharged through a time-saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. The game ball that is discharged through the time-saving area discharge path to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by a time-saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. Based on this, a time-saving transition control is performed to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) in which variable display is easier to execute than in the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the small win game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. In this case, the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage of the game ball. In other words, if the game is already in the time-saving state, even if a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the game is configured so that the time-saving transition control is not performed to extend the period during which the game is in the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the normal state, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the small winning game state is controlled and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state and the small winning game state ends, and when the next variable display is started, time-saving transition control based on the passage is performed and the game is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state. In other words, when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time-saving state until the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state. With this configuration, after one game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, another game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 or the miss area 063AK21, which can cause inconsistency between the control of the game state and the presentation after the end of the small win game state, confusing the player and reducing his interest in the game. In other words, with this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate control according to the state.

The game ball that enters the losing area 063AK21 passes through the losing area passage switch 063AK24, is detected by the losing area passage switch 063AK24, and is then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path (not shown). The game ball that is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path is detected by the losing area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special game, when the small win symbol is derived and displayed and the game is controlled to a small win game state, and the large win opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball that entered the large win opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21, after the small win game state ends, no control is performed to change the game state based on the passage.

The jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25 is provided at the top and bottom of the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26 is provided at the top and bottom of the time-saving area 063AK20. The loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 is provided at the top and bottom of the loss area 063AK21. The jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are equipped with light-emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and are configured to be able to emit light. Details will be described later, but in the feature section 063AK, a performance is performed in which the jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner. FIG. 12-4(a) shows a state in which the jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is equipped with a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right, and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. A game ball that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through either the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the loss region 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-4(b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and a miss area entrance 063AK33. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and the miss area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged in the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 is connected to the jackpot area 063AK19, and a game ball that passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area entrance 063AK32 is connected to the time-saving area 063AK20, and a game ball that passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. The loss area entrance 063AK33 is connected to the loss area 063AK21, and a game ball that passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is disposed above the jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage opening 063AK34 through which the game balls can pass. In the following, for ease of understanding, the P coordinate axis shown in FIG. 12-4(b) is set. The P coordinate axis is set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and moves back and forth along the left-right direction between position P6 as the left end position shown in FIG. 12-4(b) and position P3 as the right end position. FIG. 12-4(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0 as the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0 shown in Fig. 12-4(b), as shown in Fig. 12-5(a), the game ball A4 that enters the distribution section 063AK18 passes through the passage opening 063AK34 formed in the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32. The game ball A4 that passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P3 shown in Fig. 12-4(b), as shown in Fig. 12-5(b), the game ball A5 that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 hits the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the distribution member 063AK28, moves left along the inclination direction, and passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution unit 063AK18. The game ball A5 that passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the sorting member 063AK28 is located at position P6 shown in FIG. 12-4(b), as shown in FIG. 12-5(c), the game ball A6 that enters the sorting section 063AK18 hits the right-side inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the sorting member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclination direction, and passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the sorting section 063AK18. The game ball A6 that passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be capable of executing operations according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 12-6. FIG. 12-6 shows the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28 over time when the distribution member 063AK28 is operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the change in the area through which the game balls pass over time. When the distribution member 063AK28 is not operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, it is stopped at position P0 shown in FIG. 12-4 (b).

As shown in FIG. 12-6, when the distributing member 063AK28 starts to operate according to the distributing member operation pattern, it stops at position P0 for a predetermined center waiting time, then moves to the right from position P0 at a constant speed, passes position P1 to the right of position P0 shown in FIG. 12-4(b), passes position P2 to the right of position P1 shown in FIG. 12-4(b), and reaches position P3 shown in FIG. 12-4(b). The time required for the distributing member 063AK28 to reach position P3 from position P0 may be predetermined as the center-right movement time. The distributing member 063AK28 that has reached position P3 stops at position P3 for a predetermined right-end waiting time. Next, the distributing member 063AK28 moves to the left from position P3 at a constant speed, passes position P2, passes position P1, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach position P0 from position P3 may be predetermined as a right-center movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached position P0 stops at position P0 for a center waiting time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward from position P0 at a constant speed, passes position P4 on the left side of position P0 shown in FIG. 12-4(b), passes position P5 on the left side of position P4 shown in FIG. 12-4(b), and reaches position P6 shown in FIG. 12-4(b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach position P6 from position P0 may be predetermined as a center-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached position P6 stops at position P6 for a predetermined left-end waiting time. The distribution member 063AK28 then moves from position P6 to the right at a constant speed, passing through position P5, then through position P4, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from position P6 may be predetermined as the left-center movement time. Once the distribution member 063AK28 has reached position P0, it repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 moves back and forth in the left-right direction between positions P3 and P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 is operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through either the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the miss region 063AK21, depending on the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, the period during which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P2 and P3 is the jackpot region passing period during which the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the jackpot region 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P0 and P1 and the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P0 and P4 are time-saving region passing periods during which the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the time-saving region 063AK20. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P5 and P6 is a loss region passing period during which the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the loss region 063AK21. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P1 and P2, and the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P4 and P5 are uncertain passing area periods during which it is not certain whether the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 will enter the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 as a result of being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

In this embodiment, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, a small win start effect (small win fanfare effect) that notifies the player that control to the small win game state has begun is executable, and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start operating according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small win start effect. As shown in FIG. 12-6, the small win start effect begins in response to the passage of a predetermined special win confirmation display time after the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and ends in response to the passage of the small win start effect time.

In this embodiment, in the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the opening and closing of the large prize opening begins in response to the end of the small win start performance. As described above, the opening and closing of the large prize opening ends when one of the following conditions is met: the 0.1 second open state is repeated up to the specified upper limit of opening times, or game balls enter the large prize opening 063AK4 up to the specified upper limit of winning balls.

In this embodiment, in the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the small win start performance ends and the opening and closing of the large prize opening begins, the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state, and the rotating piece 063AK10 is in a state where it can hold the game ball that has entered the sorting section supply path 063AK8. After being controlled to the ON state, the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state in response to the passage of a predetermined game ball holding time having elapsed. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 flicks the game ball it has been holding toward the sorting section supply path 063AK8, and the flicked game ball flows down the sorting section supply path 063AK8 and enters the sorting section 063AK18. With this configuration, in this embodiment, only one of the game balls that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the other game balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the big winning game state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to the on state. With this configuration, in this embodiment, all game balls that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the big winning game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, at time t0, when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the on state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game ball that was deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-6, the time t0 when the game ball entered the distribution section 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t0 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the jackpot area 063AK19.

The game ball holding time is set to be longer than the time required to open and close the large prize opening a predetermined maximum number of times during a small win game state. In other words, the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 after the large prize opening has been opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, the timing at which the gaming ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 12-6) is specified by the special chart confirmation display time, the small win start presentation time, and the gaming ball holding time.

In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the special chart confirmation display time and game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the type of small win, while the small win start performance time is set to one of several types of time depending on the type of small win. With this configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is configured to differ depending on the type of small win.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the small win start presentation time is set to one of the predetermined first to third specific times shown in FIG. 12-7 depending on the type of small win. As shown in FIG. 12-7, the second specific time (e.g., 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (e.g., 11 seconds), and the third specific time (e.g., 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in FIG. 12-7, when the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the lapse of the special chart fixed display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the lapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-7, since time t1 is included in the loss area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t1 passes through the loss area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time, a game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the loss area 063AK21.

When the small win start performance time is set to the second specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the lapse of the special chart confirmation display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the lapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-7, since time t2 is included in the time-saving area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t2 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the second specific time, a game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20.

When the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the elapse of the special chart confirmation display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the elapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 12-7, since time t3 is included in the jackpot area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t3 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, a game ball that enters the big win hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on whether the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time to the third specific time, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. In the feature section 063AK, by setting the small win start performance time to one of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on the type of small win, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the area that corresponds to the type of small win among the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21.

In feature section 063AK, when a variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small win variation") is executed in which a small win pattern is derived and displayed in a special chart game and the display result of the variable display becomes "small win", as a performance corresponding to the small win variation, as shown in FIG. 12-8(a), in addition to the right hit promotion performance and small win start performance described above, a time-saving suggestion performance, a passing teasing performance, and a passing notification performance can be executed.

In this embodiment, as a right-hit promotion effect, a right-hit promotion image showing an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-hit promotion effect is executed during the period controlled to the time-saving state and the big win game state, and is also executed during the period controlled to the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 12-8(a).

In addition, in this embodiment, as a small win start effect, an effect is executed in which a right arrow image and a small win start image are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The right arrow image has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and is an effect image showing the message "Aim right!". The small win start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and shows the message "Put the ball here!", and is an effect image that encourages the player to win the game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7. As described above, the small win start effect is started in response to the small win pattern being derived and displayed in the special chart game and control to the small win game state being started, and then ends in response to the small win start effect time having elapsed.

The time-saving suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state, and is configured to be executable during the execution of a small win variation. As described above, in the normal state, the game ball that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small win game state. In response to this, in the feature part 063AK, in the normal state, when a small win variation is executed, a time-saving suggestion effect is configured to be executable during the execution of the small win variation as an effect that suggests that a small win pattern will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game. With this configuration, in the normal state, a variety of effects can be executed in the variable display when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and interest in the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 12-8(a), when a normal reach effect, which is a reach effect of a normal reach, a super reach effect, which is a reach effect of a super reach, and a time-saving suggestion effect are executed in a small win fluctuation, the time-saving suggestion effect starts after a reach is established, a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach effect is executed, and then ends when a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game and the small win fluctuation ends. Details of the time-saving suggestion effect are explained below with reference to FIG. 12-9(a) and FIG. 12-9(b).

As shown in FIG. 12-9(a), when the time-saving suggestion effect starts, a predetermined losing symbol (in this embodiment, "767") is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner different from the derived display in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5. Next, a re-variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and then a time-saving suggestion symbol suggesting that the time will be reduced as shown in FIG. 12-9(b) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The time-saving suggestion symbol is a combination of decorative symbols in which a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a decorative symbol showing the message "Chance" is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Returning to FIG. 12-9(a), after the time-saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is re-variably displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the time-saving suggestion performance ends when the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the small win variation ends.

Returning to FIG. 12-8(a), the passing teasing effect is an effect suggesting that the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state will pass through either the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (an effect that suggests passing through the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21). The passing teasing effect is started in response to the end of the small prize start effect and the start of the opening and closing of the large prize opening, and ends in response to the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passing through either the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21.

The passing notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether a game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 in a small winning game state has passed through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. In this embodiment, the passing notification effect is executed as a small winning end effect (small winning ending effect) that notifies the player that control to the small winning game state is ending. The passing notification effect is started in response to a game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 in a small winning game state passing through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21, and then ends in response to the passage of a predetermined passing notification effect time.

In this embodiment, the passing notification display time is set to any one of the predetermined first to third special times depending on whether the game ball that entered the big winning port 063AK4 in the small winning game state passed through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, the passing notification display time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). Also, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the passing notification display time is set to the first special time in the same manner as when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, in response to the fact that the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passing. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the passing notification display time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19, the passing notification performance time is set to the third special time (e.g., 10 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate control depending on the situation.

As shown in FIG. 12-8(b), in feature section 063AK, the presence or absence of the time-saving suggestion effect, the passing teasing effect, and the passing notification effect, or the performance mode, are configured to differ depending on whether a small win fluctuation is executed in the normal state or when a small win fluctuation is executed in the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-8(b), when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time-saving suggestion effect can be executed during the small hit variation, whereas when a small hit variation is executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during the small hit variation. In other words, in the feature part 063AK, it is configured to be possible to execute different effects during the small hit variation when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state and a small hit pattern is derived and displayed, and when a small hit variation is executed in the time-saving state and a small hit pattern is derived and displayed.

In the characteristic section 063AK, when in the normal state, a time-saving indication effect can be executed when a small win variation is executed, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation that the time-saving transition control will be performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the feature part 063AK, when the time-saving state is reached, the time-saving indication effect is not executed when a small win variation is executed. This prevents the player from having expectations that the time-saving state will be entered based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though time-saving transition control based on the game ball's passage through the time-saving area 063AK20 is not executed, and thus prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in feature unit 063AK, when a small win variation is executed in the normal state and a small win pattern is derived and displayed, and when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state and a small win pattern is derived and displayed, different effects can be executed during the execution of the small win variation, so that suitable effects can be executed depending on the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 12-8(b), when a small win variation is executed in the normal state, when the small win variation is ended and the game is controlled to the small win game state and the large prize opening is performed, a normal time passing prompting effect (special effect) is executed as a passing prompting effect, which is an effect that suggests passing through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21. On the other hand, when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state, when the small win variation is ended and the game is controlled to the small win game state and the large prize opening is performed, a time-saving time passing prompting effect (special effect) is executed as a passing prompting effect, which is an effect that suggests passing through the big win area 063AK19 and the miss area 063AK21, without suggesting passing through the time-saving area 063AK29.

In this embodiment, the normal time passing teasing effect is an effect that suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. In contrast, in this embodiment, the time-saving time passing teasing effect is an effect that suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21 without suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20.

In the characteristic section 063AK, when the small win game state is entered after the small win fluctuation ends in the normal state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, a normal time passing incentive is executed, so that the player feels a sense of anticipation for the time-saving state being entered based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and interest in the game can be increased.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game is controlled to a small win game state after the small win fluctuation ends in the time-saving state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, a time-saving time passage stimulation effect is executed, thereby preventing the player from having expectations that the game ball will be controlled to the time-saving state based on its passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though no control based on the game ball's passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 is performed, and thus preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic section 063AK, when the small win fluctuation is ended in the normal state and the small win game state is controlled to the open state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal time passing prompting effect is executed, while when the small win fluctuation is ended in the time-saving state and the small win game state is controlled to the open state and the time-saving time passing prompting effect is executed, so that an appropriate effect can be performed according to the state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-10(a), the normal time passing prompting effect is to display a normal time passing prompting image AK1 on the screen of the image display device 5, illuminate the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 and the loss area light emitting unit 063AK27 provided on the special variable winning ball device 7, and output a normal time passing prompting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, indicating the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time saving? Is it a loss?".

The normal passing teaser image AK1 includes a jackpot area passing teaser image AK2 that displays the message "jackpot" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving area passing teaser image AK3 that displays the message "time-saving" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20, and a miss area passing teaser image AK4 that displays the message "miss" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21.

In the characteristic part 063AK, the display mode of the normal time passing teasing image AK1 is configured to suggest the expectation (proportion) of being controlled to a big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 in the small win game state, the expectation of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the expectation of the game ball passing through the miss area 063AK21 in the small win game state. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the normal time passing teasing image AK1 and increase the interest in the game. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the normal time passing teasing image AK1, the big win area passing teasing image AK2 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the big win area 063AK19 in the small win game state (the expectation that the game state will be controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state ends), the time-saving area passing teasing image AK3 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state (the expectation that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends), and the miss area passing teasing image AK4 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 in the small win game state.

As described later, in this embodiment, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol), the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state at a higher rate than when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol), and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state. Correspondingly, in this embodiment, in the normal state, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game and the game is controlled to the small win game state, the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10(a) in the normal time passing prompting performance, while when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game and the game is controlled to the small win game state, the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10(b) in the normal time passing prompting performance. In the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10(b), the display area of the time-saving area passing prompting image AK2 is larger than that in the display mode shown in FIG. 12-10(a). The normal time passing prompting effect shown in FIG. 12-10(b), which is executed when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, is the same as the normal time passing prompting effect shown in FIG. 12-10(a), which is executed when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, except that the display mode of the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is different.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-10(c), the time-saving time passage teasing effect is performed by displaying a time-saving time passage teasing image AK5 on the screen of the image display device 5, illuminating the jackpot area light-emitting unit 063AK25 and the miss area light-emitting unit 063AK27 without illuminating the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and outputting a time-saving time passage teasing sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a miss?" from the speakers 8L and 8R. The time-saving time passage teasing image AK5 includes a jackpot area passage teasing image AK2 and a miss area passage teasing image AK4, but does not include a time-saving area passage teasing image AK3.

Returning to FIG. 12-8(b), in the normal state, when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in a small win game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, a normal-time jackpot area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect, notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 and will be controlled to the jackpot game state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the normal-time jackpot area passing notification effect, a normal-time jackpot area passing notification image showing the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20 and will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the time-saving area passing notification effect, a time-saving area passing notification image showing the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 during a small win game state, a loss area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the loss area 063AK21 and that no control to change the game state will be performed after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the loss area passing notification effect, a performance is executed in which a loss area passing notification image showing the message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In contrast, in the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 12-8(b), when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in a small win game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect different from the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect, notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 and will be controlled to the jackpot game state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect, a time-saving jackpot area passing notification image showing the message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the time-saving state, when a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the above-mentioned loss area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect in response to the fact that time-saving transition control based on the passing is not performed.

In the time-saving state, when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the loss area 063AK21, a loss area passage notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-8(a) and FIG. 12-8(b), in the feature section 063AK, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to an open state and then the large winning opening 063AK is controlled to a closed state, different effects can be executed when the game ball passes through the large winning area 063AK19 and when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to the effects executed when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 063AK, as shown in FIG. 12-8(b), in the normal state, a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed, so that the player is made aware that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball having passed through the time-saving area 063AK20, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game during the time-saving state, and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a notification of passing through a losing area is executed. This prevents the player from having expectations that the game ball will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though no time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

In this way, the feature unit 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects depending on whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game in the normal state and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, or whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game in the time-saving state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, thereby allowing suitable control to be performed depending on the state when the small win pattern is derived and displayed.

More specifically, the characteristic part 063AK is configured to be able to execute the same miss area passing notification effect when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state and when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21 in the time-saving state and does not pass through either the big win area 063AK19 or the time-saving area 063AK20. With this configuration, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, even though no control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8(b), the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute a time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect that differs from the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time-saving state. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to the effect executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as described later, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special game that is likely to be executed in the time-saving state, and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special game that is likely to be executed in the normal state, and the game ball is controlled to a "big win A" that is more advantageous to the player than a "big win B" after the end of the small win game state at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to whether the time-saving big win area passing notification effect or the normal big win area passing notification effect is executed when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 12-11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing as normal processing of the special symbol for feature part 063AK.

When the normal special symbol processing starts, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 063AKS101). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 063AKS101, the second reserved memory count value stored in the second reserved memory count counter in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

In this embodiment, for example, a second special symbol reservation memory unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has entered the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a second start winning has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) in the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition by the game ball's entry, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 reads out numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "1" (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 063AKS102, for example, the second reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the reserved memory count of the second special chart, and the reserved data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step 063AKS103). Also, in the processing of step 063AKS103, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the reserved memory count value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special chart designation buffer, to "2" (step 063AKS104).

When the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in RAM 102 is read and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1).

Note that the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and for example, the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

In this embodiment, for example, a first special symbol reservation memory unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has entered the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a first start winning has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball's entry, as reserved data until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like.

Following the processing of step 063AKS115, for example, the first reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special pattern reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step 063AKS116). Also, in the processing of step 063AKS116, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved memory count value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special pattern designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing either the process of step 063AKS104 or 063AKS117, the CPU 103 selects and sets the special symbol display result determination table corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" (step 063AKS105). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1," the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(a) is set as the table to be used. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2," the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(b) is set as the table to be used.

The first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(a) is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(b) is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(b), the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(b), the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special chart display result as a "big win" to a big win game state, or whether or not to control the special chart display result as a "small win" to a small win game state.

In addition, in the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(b), a larger determination value is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win" compared to the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(a). In other words, in the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(b), determination data is assigned so that there is a higher probability that the special chart display result will be determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state in the second special chart display result determination table.

Returning to FIG. 12-11, following the processing of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer with the determination value assigned to "jackpot" in the special chart display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105 to determine whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 judges whether or not it has been determined in step 063AKS106 that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107). Then, if it is determined that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-13(b) as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of multiple types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109 to determine the jackpot type as either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" shown in FIG. 12-13(a) depending on whether the special pattern ("variable special pattern") variably displayed in the special pattern game is the first special pattern or the second special pattern (whether the variable special pattern buffer value is "1" or "2") (step 063AKS110).

Both "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" shown in Figure 12-13 (a) are "non-probable jackpots" that are not controlled to a probable variable state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When controlled to "jackpot A", the game is controlled to a time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When controlled to "jackpot B", the game is controlled to a time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed once after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Jackpot A", which is controlled to a time-saving state for a longer period after the end of the jackpot gaming state than "jackpot B", is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B". In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-13(b), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, the jackpot type is determined to be either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", while when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot A" and not "jackpot B". With this configuration, when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game, it is controlled to be "jackpot A", which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B", at a higher rate than when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game.

Returning to FIG. 12-11, after executing the processing of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 stores the determined jackpot type by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110 (step 063AKS111). As an example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", and if it is "jackpot B", the value can be set to "1".

In step 063AKS107, if it is determined that the variable display result was not determined to be a "big hit" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer with the determination value assigned to "small hit" in the special chart display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105 to determine whether or not the special chart display result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS118).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 judges whether or not it has been determined in step 063AKS118 that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step 063AKS120). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 12-14 (b) as the table to be used for determining the small win type as one of multiple types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the small win type determination table set in step 063AKS121 to determine the small win type as one of "small win A" to "small win E" shown in FIG. 12-14(a) depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart (whether the variable special chart buffer value is "1" or "2") (step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 12-14(a), "small hit A" and "small hit B" are small hit types in which a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be in an open state in a small hit game state, passes through the large winning area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time described above. As described above, when the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. If a game ball that entered the large prize entry port 063AK4 during the small prize game state of "small prize A" passes through the large prize area 063AK19, the game state will be controlled to the large prize game state of "large prize A" after the small prize game state ends. In contrast, if a game ball that entered the large prize entry port 063AK4 during the small prize game state of "small prize B" passes through the large prize area 063AK19, the game state will be controlled to the large prize game state of "large prize B" after the small prize game state ends.

"Small hit C" and "Small hit D" are small hit types in which a game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be in an open state in a small hit game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start performance time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state of "small win C," the game is controlled to the time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends. In contrast, when a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state of "small win D," the game is controlled to the time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed one time after the small win game state ends.

"Small win E" is a type of small win in which a game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in a small win game state, passes through the miss area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win E", the small win start presentation time is set to the first specific time described above. As described above, when the small win start presentation time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the miss area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small win type is "small win E", the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the miss area 063AK21.

In the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 12-14(b), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the small win type is determined to be "small win A" which is controlled to be "big win A" which is more advantageous to the player than "big win B" when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 at a higher rate than when the variable special chart is the first special chart. With this configuration, when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game, and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game state ends with the small win state, the small win type is controlled to be "big win A" which is more advantageous to the player than "big win B" at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 12-14(b), the sum of the percentage of the small hit type determined to be "small hit A" and the percentage of the small hit type determined to be "small hit B" corresponds to the expectation of being controlled to a large hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the game ball passing through the large hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state. Also, the sum of the percentage of the small hit type determined to be "small hit C" and the percentage of the small hit type determined to be "small hit D" corresponds to the expectation of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state. Also, the percentage of the small hit type determined to be "small hit E" corresponds to the expectation of not being controlled to change the game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the game ball passing through the miss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(b), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the ratio (15%) of the small hit type being determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (15%) of the small hit type being determined to be "small hit D" combined (30%) is greater than the ratio (15%) of the small hit type being determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (10%) of the small hit type being determined to be "small hit D" combined (25%) when the variable special chart is the first special chart. That is, in the feature part 063AK, when the small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game, the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state at a higher ratio than when the small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game, and is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state. This configuration allows the player to focus on whether a small win symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special game, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 12-11, after executing the processing of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 stores the determined small hit type by, for example, setting a small hit type buffer value, which is the stored value of a small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122 (step 063AKS123). As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it can be set to "1", if it is "small hit C", it can be set to "2", if it is "small hit D", it can be set to "3", and if it is "small hit E", it can be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, if it is determined that the special symbol display result has not been determined to be a "small win" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the processing of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103 determines the determined special symbol (step 063AKS112) in response to the result of a prior determination of whether or not to control the game state to a big win or a small win, or the result of determining the type of big win if the game state is a big win.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "1", which is a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting processing (step 063AKS113), and then ends the normal processing of the special symbol. If the first special symbol reserved memory count is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 063AKS124), and then ends the normal processing of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process processing, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIG. 12-15.

As shown in FIG. 12-15, in this embodiment, there are preset variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss," variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit," and variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit."

In this embodiment, there are three types of super reaches: Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C. The fluctuation patterns shown in Figure 12-15 include fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA5-1 in which normal reach performance is executed, as well as fluctuation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, fluctuation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and fluctuation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed. In this embodiment, the reach performance of Super Reach A is performed by displaying a character image of character A on the screen of the image display device 5, the reach performance of Super Reach B is performed by displaying a character image of character B on the screen of the image display device 5, and the reach performance of Super Reach C is performed by displaying a character image of character C on the screen of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win" include variation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is executed, and variation patterns PA5-1, PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 12-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S111 of the special pattern process processing as a variation pattern setting process for feature part 063AK.

When the fluctuation pattern setting process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 063AK201). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-17 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 12-17, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PB3-1, in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PA3-1, in which the normal reach performance is executed, fluctuation pattern PB3-2, in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB3-1, and fluctuation pattern PB3-3, in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB3-2. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation rate is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, and higher when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed than when the normal reach performance is executed.

Returning to FIG. 12-16, if it is determined in step 063AK201 that the big win flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on or not (step 063AKS207). If it is determined that the small win flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-18 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 12-18, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PB2-1, in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a lower rate than fluctuation pattern PA2-1, in which the normal reach performance is executed, fluctuation pattern PB2-2, in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a lower rate than fluctuation pattern PB2-1, and fluctuation pattern PB2-3, in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB2-2.

Returning to FIG. 12-16, if it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small win flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS209). The time-saving flag is a flag that indicates that the reel is being controlled to the time-saving state.

When it is determined that the time-saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for normal state shown in FIG. 12-19(a) to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB4-3 in which the time-saving suggestion performance is executed, corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit", depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" can be determined based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 12-19(b) to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 in which the variable display result is a "small hit" and the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" (step 063AKS211). With this configuration, when a small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the time-saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation, while when a small hit fluctuation is executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in Figure 12-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 12-19 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, and is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-3 and PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19 (expectation of passing through the jackpot area) is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the reach performances from Super Reach A to Super Reach C will be executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in Figure 12-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 12-19 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed, and is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 (expectation of passing through the time-saving area) is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the reach performances from Super Reach A to Super Reach C will be executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 12-16, after executing the processing of step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the determined special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. By setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is derived. The special symbol variation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special symbol variation time in a game control process timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 063AKS203, the CPU 103 performs a setting to start the variation of the special pattern so that either the special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the special pattern game using the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B, in which the start condition is satisfied, is started (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", a setting is performed to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", a setting is performed to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B. This starts the special pattern game. Note that when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special pattern, it may control the first reserved indicator 25A to cause the first reserved indicator 25A to perform a display that can identify the first special pattern reserved memory number that has been subtracted by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special chart, it may control the second reserved display 25B to cause the second reserved display 25B to display an indication that identifies the second special chart reserved memory number that has been reduced by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a command (change start command) at the start of the change in the special pattern in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special pattern display results, the change pattern determination results, etc. (step 063AKS205). For example, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as variation start commands, a first variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special chart reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the first special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, i.e., the number of first special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game). On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as variation start commands, a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special chart reserved memory number designation command (the second special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, i.e., a command including EXT data indicating the number of second special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game). In this embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit", the determination result of which of multiple types of big hits the big hit type will be when the variable display result is a "big hit" (big hit type determination result), and the determination result of which of multiple types of small hits the small hit type will be when the variable display result is a "small hit" (small hit type determination result).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to "2", which corresponds to the special pattern variation processing (step 063AKS206), and then ends the normal special pattern processing.

Figure 12-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S113 of the special symbol process processing as the special symbol stop processing for feature part 063AK.

When the special symbol stop process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmation display flag, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is ON (step 063AKS301). Here, the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step 063AKS305 described later in response to the derivation and display of a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special pattern confirmation display flag is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 performs settings to derive and display the confirmed special pattern (step 063AKS302) and performs settings to send a decorative pattern stop command to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS303). The decorative pattern stop command is also called a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special pattern confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the processing of step 063AKS304, the special pattern confirmation display time timer value, which is the stored value of the special pattern confirmation display time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special pattern confirmation display time. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sets the special pattern confirmation display in progress flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special pattern stop processing.

In step 063AKS301, when the special pattern confirmation display in progress flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the processing of step 063AKS306, the special pattern confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed can be determined depending on whether the updated special pattern confirmation display time timer value is "0". If the special pattern confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), the special pattern stop processing is terminated, and the process waits until the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed.

When the special chart confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special chart confirmation display flag to an off state (step 063AKS307), and then determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start performance waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start performance time during which the jackpot start performance (jackpot fanfare performance) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a jackpot start command (jackpot fanfare command) corresponding to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag to the OFF state (step 063AKS311) and clears the time-saving flag to the OFF state (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state (a presentation control command that designates the current game state in pachinko game 1) from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 (step 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening count value, which is the stored value of the opening counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value (in this embodiment, "15") corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, 15 times) (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving count counter (063AKS315). The time-saving count counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of time-saving times, which is the remaining number of times of the variable display controlled in the time-saving state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time-saving count counter is cleared, and the time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the time-saving count counter, is set to the initial value of "0". After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is the value corresponding to the process before the opening of the jackpot (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the big win flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on or not (step 063AKS317). If it is determined that the small win flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special symbol (step 063AKS318).

When it is determined in step 063AKS317 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start performance waiting time to one of the above-mentioned first to third specific times (step 063AKS319). The small hit start performance waiting time corresponds to the small hit start performance time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 determines the small hit start performance waiting time to one of the first to third specific times depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" by referring to the small hit start performance waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 12-21, and sets the small hit start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the small hit start performance waiting time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start performance waiting time. The small hit type may be determined based on the small hit type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 12-21, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start presentation time is set to the second specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the second specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start presentation time is set to the first specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the first specific time.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a hit start designation command (small hit fanfare command) corresponding to a small hit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS320).

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start operating according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small win flag to the off state (step 063AKS322), and sets the opening count value to a value (in this embodiment, "10") corresponding to the upper limit opening number (in this embodiment, 10 times) of the large prize opening opening and closing in the small win game state (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS325). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

When it is determined that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the time-saving count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS326), and determines whether the updated time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined that the time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state (step 063AKS329), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

Figure 12-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S118 of the special pattern process processing as pre-processing for the small win release for feature part 063AK.

When the small win release pre-processing starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the processing of step 063AKS401, the small win start performance waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed is determined depending on whether the updated small win start performance waiting time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the small win start performance waiting time has not elapsed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win release pre-processing.

In step 063AKS401, if it is determined that the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 to the on state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets the game ball holding time timer value, which is the stored value of the game ball holding time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "9", which is a value corresponding to the small win opening processing (step 063AKS404), and ends the small win opening pre-processing.

Figure 12-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S119 of the special symbol process processing as processing during the opening of a small win for feature part 063AK.

When the small win opening process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the opening count value is "0" (step 063AKS501). If it is determined that the opening count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small win game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined upper limit number of winning balls in the small win game state (10 balls in this embodiment) (step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times game balls have been detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of winning balls.

In step 063AKS502, if it is determined that the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 063AK4 is less than the upper limit number of winning balls (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503). If it is determined that it is time to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door to the on state, thereby controlling the large prize opening 063AK4 to an open state (step 063AKS504), and performs settings for sending a command to specify that the large prize opening is open (step 063AKS505). After performing the processing of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates the opening count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS506).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the timing to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening processing. When it is determined that it is the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door to the off state, thereby controlling the large prize opening 063AK4 to the closed state (step 063AKS508). After executing the processing of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a designated command after the large prize opening is opened (step 063AKS509), and ends the processing during the opening of the small prize.

If it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the opening count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have entered the large winning port 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of winning balls (step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and determines whether the game ball holding time has elapsed depending on whether the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS510 that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 to the off state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passed through any of the big prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passed through any of the big prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 depending on whether or not any of the big prize area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, or the miss area passing flag, all of which are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is on.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has been turned on (whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has detected the game ball) (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has been turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519) and ends the small jackpot opening process.

In step 063AKS518, if it is determined that the big win area passage switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is on (whether the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 detects a game ball) (step 063AKS520). If it is determined that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS522) and ends the small win opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the miss area passage switch 063AK24 has been turned on (whether or not the miss area passage switch 063AK24 has detected a game ball) (step 063AKS523). If it is determined that the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the miss area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS524) and ends the small win opening process.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK24 is on (step 063AKS520; Yes), when it is determined that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the time-saving area passage flag is not set to the on state, and the failure area passage flag is set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through either the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether all gaming balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during the small prize game state have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 determines whether all of the game balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7, depending on whether the total of the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times game balls are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16), the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch), and the number of game balls detected by the loss area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the loss area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5.

If it is determined in step 063AKS513 that all game balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 have not been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the small prize opening process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all game balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to end operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS514).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a hit end designation command (small hit ending command) corresponding to the small hit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 transmits a performance control command as a hit end designation command corresponding to a small hit, indicating whether the game state will be controlled to a big hit game state or a time-saving game state after the small hit game state ends, the type of big hit if the game state is controlled to a big hit game state after the small hit game state ends, and the number of variable displays that will be controlled to the time-saving game state if the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state after the small hit game state ends.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. 12-24 to select one of small hit end designation commands 1 to 5 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit, depending on the state of the big hit area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, and the miss area passing flag, and the type of small hit, and performs settings to send the selected command.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-24, when the big win area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win A", a small win end designation command 1 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the big win A big win game state after the small win game state ends. When the big win area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win B", a small win end designation command 2 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the big win B big win game state after the small win game state ends. When the time-saving area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win C", a small win end designation command 3 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends. When the time-saving area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win D", a small win end designation command 4 is transmitted, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed once after the small win game state ends. If the failure zone passing flag is set to the on state, regardless of the type of small win, a small win end command 5 is sent indicating that no control to change the game state will be performed after the small win game state ends.

Returning to FIG. 12-23, after executing the processing of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to one of the above-mentioned first to third special times (step 063AKS516). The passing notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passing notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 determines the passing notification effect waiting time to one of the first to third special times according to the state of the jackpot area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, and the miss area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 12-25, and sets the passing notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification effect waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the determined passing notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 12-25, in this embodiment, when the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, when the time-saving area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the loss area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time.

Returning to FIG. 12-23, after executing the processing of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "10", which corresponds to the small win end processing (step 063AKS517), and ends the small win open processing.

Figure 12-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S120 of the special pattern process processing as a small win end processing for feature part 063AK.

When the small win end process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the passing notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passing notification effect waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and determines whether the passing notification effect waiting time has elapsed depending on whether the updated passing notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the passing notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win end process.

When it is determined that the waiting time for the passing notification effect has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing flag is on or not (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type buffer value according to the small jackpot type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small jackpot type is "small jackpot A" that is controlled to the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" after the small jackpot game state ends, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0" corresponding to "jackpot A", while if the small jackpot type is "small jackpot B" that is controlled to the jackpot game state of "jackpot B" after the small jackpot game state ends, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "1" corresponding to "jackpot B". The small jackpot type may be identified based on the small jackpot type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS605), and sets the main board 11 to send a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the jackpot to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving flag to the off state (step 063AKS607), and sets the main board 11 to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time-saving count counter (063AKS610). After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "4", which corresponds to the pre-big win release processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small win end processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving area passing flag is on or not (step 063AKS612). If it is determined that the time-saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS614) and sets the time-saving count value according to the small win type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small win type is "small win C" in which the time-saving state is controlled for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends, the time-saving count value is set to "5", while if the small win type is "small win D" in which the time-saving state is controlled for the period until the variable display is executed once after the small win game state ends, the time-saving count value is set to "1". The small win type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating the time-saving state from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

If it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time-saving area passage flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the failure area passage flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the processing of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 063AKS618), and then ends the small win end processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the small win end process is started in response to the end of the small win open process in which the large prize opening is opened, and when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612; Yes), the time-saving flag is set to the ON state in the small win end process (step 063AKS614). With this configuration, when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time-saving state until the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state.

In the feature section 063AK, in the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the above-mentioned processes are executed as processes in the special symbol process processing of step S25, and in the information output processing of step S23, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11-36 is executed as in the feature section 059AK. With this configuration, in the information output processing of step S23, in the feature section 063AK, in addition to the jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, and the jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that a time-saving state is occurring (that a special prize is occurring), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is occurring is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, as in the feature section 059AK.

With this configuration, the external device can suitably identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state in both cases, whether the time-saving state is controlled based on the end of a big win game state, or the time-saving state is controlled after the end of a small win game state based on the game ball that entered the big win port 063AK4 during a small win game state passing through the time-saving area 063AK4 in the normal state.

Figure 12-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as variable display start setting processing for feature part 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 is on or not (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the display is controlled to a time-saving state. If the sub-side time-saving flag is determined to be on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 updates the sub-side time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time-saving count counter provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time-saving count counter counts the number of time-saving times (the remaining number of times the variable display is controlled to a time-saving state).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS702, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to execute a time-saving count notification performance that notifies the number of time-saving times (step 063AKS703). In this embodiment, as the time-saving count notification performance, a performance is configured to be executed in which a time-saving count notification image indicating the number of time-saving times is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the time-saving count notification performance, the time-saving count notification image is displayed in a display mode indicating the current number of time-saving times based on the sub-side time-saving count value. In this embodiment, the time-saving count notification performance is executed when a variable display is being executed in the time-saving state.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS703, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the right-hit promotion performance flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). If it is judged that the right-hit promotion performance flag is not on (step 063AKS704; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the right-hit promotion performance flag to the on state (step 063AKS705) and performs control to start the right-hit promotion performance (step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063AKS706, the presentation control CPU 120 performs settings to execute a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that control to the time-saving state has started (control from the normal state to the time-saving state) (step 063AKS707). In this embodiment, as the time-saving entry presentation, a presentation is executed in which a first time-saving entry image showing the message "Time-saving!" and a second time-saving entry image showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chute!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The second time-saving entry image is a presentation image that encourages the player to place a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. In this embodiment, the time-saving entry presentation is executed when the variable display is executed for the first time after control from the normal state to the time-saving state.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS707, or if it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-hit promotion performance flag is on (step 063AKS704; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). If it is determined that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative patterns that will be a jackpot combination as the final stop pattern that will be the final decorative pattern, which is the variable display result of the decorative patterns (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the performance control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol of the jackpot combination as the confirmed decorative symbol, for example by performing a random number lottery with reference to a decorative symbol determination table for the jackpot combination that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

In step 063AKS708, if it is determined that the special chart display result is not a "big win" (step 063AKS708; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special chart display result is a "small win" or not based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11 (step 063AKS710). If it is determined that the special chart display result is not a "small win" (step 063AKS710; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns that will be a losing combination as the confirmed decorative pattern (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the performance control CPU 120 determines the decorative patterns of the losing combination as the confirmed decorative pattern, for example, by performing a random number lottery with reference to a decorative pattern determination table for losing combinations that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

If it is determined in step 063AKS710 that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS712).

If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS712; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the normal state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(b) to determine one of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern shown in FIG. 12-28(a) as the fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) that will be the small win combination, depending on whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" (step 063AKS713). Whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" can be determined based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving state small win fixed decorative pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(c) to determine one of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern shown in FIG. 12-28(a) as the fixed decorative pattern (final stopping pattern) that will be the small win combination, depending on whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" (step 063AKS714).

The first small win pattern shown in FIG. 12-28(a) is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in red showing the message "V" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The second small win pattern is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in blue showing the message "V" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The third small win pattern is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in red showing the message "time" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The fourth small win pattern is a combination of a number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a blue rectangular decorative pattern showing the message "time" in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state. The fifth small win pattern is a combination of a number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a white rectangular decorative pattern showing the message "small" in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The first small win pattern and the second small win pattern are combinations of decorative patterns suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state. The third small win pattern and the fourth small win pattern are combinations of decorative patterns suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state.

In the determined decorative pattern determination table for small wins in the normal state shown in Figure 12-28 (b), when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B" in which the game ball passes through the large win area 063AK19, the determined decorative pattern is determined to be the fourth small win pattern at a higher rate than the fifth small win pattern, the third small win pattern at a higher rate than the fourth small win pattern, the second small win pattern at a higher rate than the third small win pattern, and the first small win pattern at a higher rate than the second small win pattern. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 and being controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state ends is higher when the first small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the second small win pattern is derived and displayed, higher when the second small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the third small win pattern is derived and displayed, higher when the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the fourth small win pattern is derived and displayed, and higher when the fourth small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the fifth small win pattern is derived and displayed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the normal state small win fixed decorative pattern determination table is configured so that the fixed decorative pattern can be determined to be the third small win pattern and the fourth small win pattern, which suggest that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 12-28(b). With this configuration, in the normal state, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggests that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, is derived and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state by the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and time-saving transition control is performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Specifically, in the table for determining the confirmed decorative pattern when a small win occurs in the normal state, as shown in Figure 12-28 (b), when the type of small win is "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the confirmed decorative pattern is determined to be the first small win pattern at a higher rate than the fifth small win pattern, the second small win pattern at a higher rate than the first small win pattern, the fourth small win pattern at a higher rate than the second small win pattern, and the third small win pattern at a higher rate than the fourth small win pattern. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state is higher when the third small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the fourth small win symbol is derived and displayed, higher when the fourth small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the second small win symbol is derived and displayed, higher when the second small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the first small win symbol is derived and displayed, and higher when the first small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the fifth small win symbol is derived and displayed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the first small win symbol to the fifth small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, which can increase the interest in the game.

In contrast, the time-saving state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(c) is configured so that the fixed decoration pattern is not determined to be the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggest that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state. With this configuration, in the time-saving state, even though time-saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 is not performed, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggests that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern, preventing the player from having expectations that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In this way, in this embodiment, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which indicates that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, can be derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the normal state, but the game is configured so that the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern is not derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the time-saving state, allowing for a suitable presentation depending on the state.

Returning to FIG. 12-27, after executing the processing of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple types of performance control patterns (performance control patterns during special chart fluctuation) prepared (set) in advance according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main board 11, and sets it as the performance control pattern to be used. If the setting for executing the time-saving count notification performance is performed in step 063AKS703, in step 063AKS715, the performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving count notification performance (time-saving count notification performance control pattern) is selected and set as the performance control pattern to be used. If the setting for executing time-saving entry performance control is performed in step 063AKS707, in step 063AKS715, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving entry performance is selected and set as the performance control pattern to be used (time-saving entry performance control pattern).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS715, the performance control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a specified area of RAM 122 according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS716).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS716, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to start variable display of decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5 by, for example, sending a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS717, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to update the pending display and active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display (step 063AKS718).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS718, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during variable display (step 063AKS719), and ends the variable display start setting processing.

Figure 12-29 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process as a variable display performance process for feature part 063AK.

When variable display performance processing is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed, for example, based on the timer value of the performance control process timer (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the performance control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the performance control process timer, for example by subtracting 1, and determines whether an end code has been read out corresponding to the updated timer value from the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special chart fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715, thereby determining whether the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a reach performance period in which a reach performance is executed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc. (step 063AKS802). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special chart change) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is a reach performance period (step 063AKS802; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the reach performance (step 063AKS803).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS803, or if it is determined in step 063AKS802 that it is not a reach display period (step 063AKS802; No), the display control CPU 120 determines whether it is a time-saving count notification display period in which a time-saving count notification display is executed based on the timer value of the display control process timer or the like (step 063AKS804). The time-saving count notification display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (time-saving count notification display control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is a time-saving count notification display period (step 063AKS804; Yes), the display control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving count notification display (step 063AKS805).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS805, or if it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time-saving count notification display period (step 063AKS804; No), the display control CPU 120 determines whether it is the time-saving suggestion display period in which the time-saving suggestion display is executed based on the timer value of the display control process timer or the like (step 063AKS806). The time-saving suggestion display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (special chart change time display control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is the time-saving suggestion display period (step 063AKS806; Yes), the display control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving suggestion display (step 063AKS807).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS807, or if it is determined in step 063AKS806 that the time-saving indication effect period is not in progress (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time-saving effect period is in which the time-saving effect is to be executed, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc. (step 063AKS808). The time-saving effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that the time-saving effect period is in progress (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving effect (step 063AKS809).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS809, or if it is determined in step 063AKS808 that the time-saving performance period is not in progress (step 063AKS808; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (step 063AKS810), and ends the performance processing during variable display.

If it is determined in step 063AKS801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern determination command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). If it is determined that a pattern determination command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance processing during variable display.

If it is determined that a pattern confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 derives and displays the confirmed decorative pattern as the final stopping pattern determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711 or step 063AKS712 in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 (step 063AKS812).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS812, the performance control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 063AKS813), updates the value of the performance process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting processing (step 063AKS814), and ends the variable display performance processing.

Figure 12-30 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S173 of the performance control process as a special chart hit waiting process for feature section 063AK.

When the special winning wait process starts, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has elapsed (step 063AKS901). If it is determined that the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time-saving flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS904), clears the right-hit promotion performance flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS905), and then controls to end the right-hit promotion performance (step 063AKS906).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS906, or if it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS903 that the sub-side time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS903; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS907), and ends the special chart hit waiting process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has not elapsed (step 063AKS901; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning start command corresponding to a jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that a hit start designation command corresponding to a jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS909, the performance control CPU 120 controls the start of the jackpot start performance (step 063AKS910), updates the value of the performance process flag to "6", which is the value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 063AKS911), and ends the special chart hit waiting processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS908 that a hit start command corresponding to a big hit has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines whether or not a hit start command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS912). If it is determined that a hit start command corresponding to a small hit has not been received (step 063AKS912; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance ends the special chart hit waiting process.

When it is determined that a hit start designation command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the small hit start presentation time to one of the first to third specific times (step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the presentation control CPU 120 determines the small hit start presentation time to one of the first to third specific times depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" by referring to the small hit start presentation time determination table shown in FIG. 12-30 (b), and sets the small hit start presentation time timer value, which is the stored value of the small hit start presentation time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start presentation time. The small hit type may be determined based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 12-30(b), in this embodiment, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, if the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start presentation time is set to the second specific time, and if the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start presentation time is set to the first specific time.

Returning to FIG. 12-30(a), after executing the processing of step 063AKS913, the presentation control CPU 120 performs control to start the small win start presentation (step 063AKS914), updates the value of the presentation process flag to "4", which corresponds to the small win mid-presentation processing (step 063AKS915), and then ends the special chart winning wait processing.

Figure 12-31 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S174 of the presentation control process as a presentation process during a small win for feature part 063AK.

When the small win mid-performance processing starts, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the small win start performance time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small win start performance time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the small win start performance time has elapsed is determined depending on whether the updated small win start performance time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the small win start performance time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1001; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small win mid-performance processing.

If it is determined that the small win start presentation time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the small win start presentation end flag provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 is on or not (step 063AKS1002). If it is determined that the small win start presentation end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the presentation control CPU 120 performs control to end the small win start presentation (step 063AKS1004) and sets the small win start presentation end flag to the on state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1005, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS1006). If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1006; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal time passing prompting performance (step 063AKS1007) and ends the small win performance processing. On the other hand, if it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time-saving time passing prompting performance (step 063AKS1008) and ends the small win performance processing.

In step 063AKS1002, if it is determined that the small win start presentation end flag is on (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has been received (step 063AKS1003). If it is determined that a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has not been received (step 063AKS1003; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the small win presentation processing.

If it is determined that a hit end designation command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 clears the small hit start presentation end flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), performs control to end the normal time passing prompting presentation or the time-saving time passing prompting presentation that is being executed as the passing prompting presentation (step 063AKS1010), and then updates the value of the presentation process flag to "5", which is the value corresponding to the small hit end presentation processing (step 063AKS1011).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1011, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has received either small hit end designation command 1 or small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the third special time (step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passing notification performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification performance time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1013, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS1014). If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1014; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs control to start the notification of passage of the jackpot area during normal time (step 063AKS1015) and ends the processing of the performance during the small win. If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs control to start the notification of passage of the jackpot area during time-saving (step 063AKS1016) and ends the processing of the performance during the small win.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1012 that neither small hit end designation command 1 nor small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either small hit end designation command 3 or small hit end designation command 4 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 3 or the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the second special time (step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passing notification performance time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1018, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time-saving area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small win performance processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1017 that neither the small win end designation command 3 nor the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the first special time (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passing notification performance time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1020, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the miss area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small win performance processing.

Figure 12-32 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S175 of the presentation control process as a small win end presentation process for feature part 063AK.

When the small win end presentation processing is started, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the passing notification presentation time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passing notification presentation time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the passing notification presentation time has elapsed is judged depending on whether the updated passing notification presentation time timer value is "0". If it is judged that the passing notification presentation time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1101; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the small win end presentation processing.

When it is determined that the passing notification presentation time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small win (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step 063AKS1103), updates the value of the presentation process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step 063AKS1104), and ends the small win end presentation process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1102 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1105). If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction flag to the on state (step 063AKS1106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the performance control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time-saving count value based on whether it has received the small win end designation command 3 or the small win end designation command 4 as the win end designation command corresponding to the small win (step 063AKS1107). If it has received the small win end designation command 3 indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the end of the small win game state, then in step 063AKS1107, it sets the sub-side time-saving count value to "5". If it has received the small win end designation command 4 indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled for the period until the variable display is executed one time after the end of the small win game state, then in step 063AKS1107, it sets the sub-side time-saving count value to "1".

If it is determined in step 063AKS1105 that neither the small win end designation command 3 nor the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108). If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time-saving flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS1110), clears the right-hit promotion performance flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS1111), and then controls to end the right-hit promotion performance (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or if it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS1109 that the sub-side time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS1109; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS1113), and ends the small win end performance process.

Below, examples of performance operations related to feature part 063AK are explained with reference to Figures 12-33 to 12-36.

First, referring to Fig. 12-33 and Fig. 12-34, an example of the presentation operation when a small win variation is executed in the normal state will be explained. Specifically, below, an example will be explained in which a small win variation is executed in the normal state, and during the small win variation, the reach presentation of Super Reach A and the time-saving suggestion presentation are executed, and the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the confirmed decoration pattern.

Figure 12-33(a) shows a state in which a losing symbol ("135") is displayed stationary in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in the normal state. Figure 12-33(b) shows a state in which a small win fluctuation has started in the normal state, and variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Figure 12-33 (c) shows a state in which a reach has been achieved and a reach effect for Super Reach A is being performed in which a character image AK6 representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 12-33(d) shows a state in which a time-saving suggestion effect has started and a predetermined losing symbol ("767") is temporarily displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Figure 12-24(e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is being displayed again in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C during the time-saving suggestion effect. Figure 12-33(f) shows a state in which the time-saving suggestion symbols are temporarily displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R during the time-saving suggestion effect. Figure 12-33(g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is being displayed again in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R during the time-saving suggestion effect.

Figure 12-33 (h) shows the state in which the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small win variation has ended.

Figure 12-33(i) shows a state in which control to the small win game state has begun, and a small win start effect is being executed in which a right arrow image AK8, which has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and shows the message "Aim to the right!", and a small win start image AK9, which shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and shows the message "Put the ball here!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 12-33(i), in response to the start of control to the small win game state, a right hit promotion effect is started, and a right hit promotion image AK7, which shows an arrow pointing to the right, is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, the performance operation shown in FIG. 12-33(i) is executed, and then the performance operation shown in FIG. 12-34(a) is executed. FIG. 12-34(a) shows the state in which the normal time passing prompting performance is executed. In the normal time passing prompting performance, as shown in FIG. 12-34(a), the screen of the image display device 5 displays the normal time passing prompting image AK1 including the jackpot area passing prompting image AK2, the time-saving area passing prompting image AK3, and the miss area passing prompting image AK4, and the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time-saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the miss area light emitting unit 063AK27 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 are illuminated, and the normal time passing prompting sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time-saving? Is it a miss?" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The following describes the performance that occurs when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the normal passing incentive performance in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-34(b) is executed. FIG. 12-34(b) shows the state in which the normal jackpot area passage notification presentation is executed, and the normal jackpot area passage notification image AK10 showing the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 12-34(c) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a performance is executed on the screen of the image display device 5 to display, as a big win start performance, a first big win start image AK11 in the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and showing the message "Aim right!", and a second big win start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball in the attacker!". The second big win start image AK12 is a performance image that encourages the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in Figure 12-34(c), the right hit promotion performance is executed following the control of the small win game state, and the right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation that occurs when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 while the normal passing incentive presentation is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-34(d) is executed. FIG. 12-34(d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passage notification presentation is executed, and a time-saving area passage notification image AK13 showing the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 12-34 (e) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state in response to the start of the next variable display, and a time-saving entry effect is executed in which a first time-saving entry image AK14 showing the message "Time-saving!" and a second time-saving entry image AK15 showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chute!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 12-34 (e), a right-hit promotion effect is executed following the control to the small win game state, and a right-hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the state shown in Figure 12-34 (e), a time-saving count notification effect is executed in response to the control to the time-saving state, and a time-saving count notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in a display mode indicating that the number of time-saving times is four.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation that occurs when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21 while the normal passing incentive presentation is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-34(a) ends and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-34(f) is executed. FIG. 12-34(f) shows the state in which the losing area passing notification presentation is executed and the losing area passing notification image AK17 showing the message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 12-34 (g) shows the state in which, after the small win game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without any change, the next variable display starts and variable display is being performed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the "left," "center," and "right."

Below, referring to Figures 12-35 and 12-36, we will explain an example of the performance operation when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state. Specifically, we will explain the case where a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state, the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed during the small win variation, and the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the confirmed decoration pattern.

Figure 12-35(a) shows a state in which a losing symbol ("135") is displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 during time-saving mode. In the state shown in Figure 12-35(a), a right-hit promotion effect is being executed, and a right-hit promotion image AK7 is being displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the state shown in Figure 12-35(a), a time-saving count notification effect is being executed, and a time-saving count notification image AK16 is being displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in a display mode indicating that the number of time-saving times is four.

Figure 12-35(b) shows a state in which, in the time-saving state, small win fluctuation has started and variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in Figure 12-35(b), the display mode of the time-saving count notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time-saving count is 3.

Figure 12-35 (c) shows a state in which a reach has been achieved, the reach performance of super reach A is executed, and a character image AK6 representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 12-35 (d) shows the state where the second small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small win variation has ended.

Figure 12-35 (e) shows a state in which control to the small win game state has begun, a small win start effect has been executed, and a right arrow image AK8 and a start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 12-35 (e), in response to the start of control to the small win game state, the right hit promotion effect continues to be executed, and a right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the time-saving state, the performance operation shown in FIG. 12-35(e) is executed, and then the performance operation shown in FIG. 12-36(a) is executed. FIG. 12-36(a) shows the state in which the time-saving time-passing prompting performance is executed. In the time-saving time-passing prompting performance, as shown in FIG. 12-36(a), a time-saving time-passing prompting image AK5 including a jackpot area passing prompting image AK2 and a miss area passing prompting image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the jackpot area light-emitting unit 063AK25 and the miss area light-emitting unit 063AK27 are illuminated without illuminating the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a time-saving time-passing prompting sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a miss?" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The following describes the performance that occurs when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the time-saving mode while the time-saving passage teasing performance is being executed.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the time-saving mode, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-36(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-36(b) is executed. FIG. 12-36(b) shows the state in which the time-saving jackpot area passing notification presentation is executed, and the time-saving jackpot area passing notification image AK18 showing the message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 12-36 (c) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the game state is controlled to a big win game state, a big win start effect is executed, and the first big win start image AK11 and the second big win start image AK12 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 12-36 (c), the right hit promotion effect is executed following the state when the game state was controlled to a small win game state, and the right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 while the time-saving time passing teasing presentation is being executed in the time-saving state. In the time-saving state, the same presentation operation is executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21.

When the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21 during the time-saving state, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-36(a) ends and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 12-36(d) is executed. FIG. 12-36(d) shows the state in which the loss area passing notification presentation is executed and the loss area passing notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 12-36 (e) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without changing, the next variable display starts, and the variable display is executed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in Figure 12-36 (e), the display mode of the time-saving count notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time-saving count is two. Also, in the state shown in Figure 12-36 (e), the right-hit promotion performance is executed following the state when the game state was controlled to the small win game state, and the right-hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As explained above, in the characteristic part 063AK, when in the normal state, a small win pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special chart game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means) is controlled to an open state, if the game ball (game medium) passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area), time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and control is performed from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state); on the other hand, when in the time-saving state, a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special chart game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage. Furthermore, in the characteristic section 063AK, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, different effects can be executed, and when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the time-saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the characteristic section 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute the same effect when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time-saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. This configuration can increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, different effects can be executed during variable display when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state and when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the time-saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the state.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state, a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state can be executed during execution of the variable display as an effect that suggests that the small win symbol will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. With this configuration, a variety of effects can be executed, increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in feature unit 063AK, when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the second special game, the time-saving state is controlled at a higher rate than when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the first special game. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the second special game, thereby increasing interest in the game.

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features shown in the above embodiment, but may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

In the above embodiment, as a pre-reading preview performance, the display mode of the reserved display displayed on the image display device 5 may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode during normal times, so that a reserved display change performance can be executed that notifies the player that the variable display corresponding to the reserved display will be controlled to a small win game state, or that a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to an open state in the small win game state, will pass through either the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

For example, the display color of the reserve display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started can be changed from the normal white color to blue, green, or red by the reserve display change effect, thereby making it possible to recognize the change in the display state of the reserve display and to indicate that the game is being controlled to a small win game state, or that the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to an open state in the small win game state, will pass through either the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the reserve display change performance is configured to be executable as a pre-reading notice, a pre-reading judgment may be made in the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process processing based on the occurrence of a start winning. In the pre-reading judgment, for example, a random number lottery may be performed by referring to the first special pattern display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(a) or the second special pattern display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(b) to perform a pre-reading judgment process as to whether the variable display result is a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss", or if the variable display result is pre-read and judged to be a "small win", a random number lottery may be performed by referring to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 12-14(b) to perform a pre-reading judgment process as to which of "small win A" to "small win E" the small win type will be. After that, in the start winning judgment process, a setting may be made to send a start winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading judgment.

The start winning command set for transmission in the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing a command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. The start winning command transmitted from the main board 11 may be stored in a start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 by, for example, executing a command analysis process in step S75 of the performance control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6.

In this case, in the pre-reading preview setting process executed in step S161 of the performance control process, depending on the reception of the start winning command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the hold display change performance as a pre-reading preview performance, and the execution mode.

When the hold memory stored when deciding whether or not to execute the hold display change performance and the execution mode includes a hold for which the variable display result is a "big hit" and a hold for which the variable display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is a "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the variable display result and the change pattern may differ between the time of the pre-read and the time of the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the pre-reading target, due to the change from the normal state to the time-saving state after the end of the variable display that is executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the pre-reading target. In such a case, an inconsistency occurs between the suggested content of the hold display change performance as a pre-reading notification performance and the actual variable display result and change pattern, which may cause the player to distrust and reduce interest in the game.

Therefore, if the stored reserves include either a reserve for which the variable display result is a "big win" or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D", the execution of the reserve display change presentation may be restricted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, if the reserved items stored do not include either a reserved item whose variable display result is a "big hit" or a reserved item whose variable display result is a "small hit" and whose small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the execution or non-execution of the reserved display change presentation and the execution mode may be determined according to the variable display result and the small hit type in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37(a). On the other hand, if the reserved items stored include either a reserved item whose variable display result is a "big hit" or a reserved item whose variable display result is a "small hit" and whose small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the execution or non-execution of the reserved display change presentation and the execution mode may be determined according to the variable display result and the small hit type in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal reserve change determination table shown in the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37(b). Whether the stored reserves include reserves for which the variable display result is a "big win" and reserves for which the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D" can be determined by checking the contents of the start winning buffer.

In the normal reserve change determination table, as shown in FIG. 12-37(a), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be blue at a higher rate than when the reserve display change performance is not executed (white), the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be green at a higher rate than when it is blue, and the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be red at a higher rate than when it is green. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reserve display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, higher when the reserve display is displayed in green than when it is displayed in blue, and higher when the reserve display is displayed in blue than when it is displayed in white (when the reserve display change performance is not executed). In contrast, in the restricted reserve change determination table, as shown in FIG. 12-37(b), the execution of the reserve display change performance in which the jackpot expectation is green or higher is restricted. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 12-37(b), the reserve display change performance in which the reserve display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be restricted to only "no execution".

In the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37(a) and the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 12-37(b), an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a "small hit", the display mode is determined to be the same as when the variable display result is a "big hit", but this is only one example, and there may be a display mode (such as "big hit?") that is unique when the variable display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", or a display mode (such as "time?") that is unique when the variable display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". With this configuration, the variety of reserve display change presentations increases, making it possible to attract the player's attention.

In the above embodiment, the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state ends may be configured to execute different effects depending on whether the reserved memory contains a reserved memory in which the special game display result is a "small win" and the small win type is a "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, or whether such a reserved memory is not contained. Such a configuration can increase interest in the game.

For example, if the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state has ended contains a reserved memory in which the special game display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D," a successful return display can be executed to notify that one of the reserved second special game games (remaining reserves) remaining after the time-saving state has ended will be controlled back to the time-saving state (there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special game in which the special game display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). On the other hand, if the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state ends does not contain a reserved memory in which the special display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", a return failure effect may be executed to notify that none of the remaining reserved memory will be controlled to the time-saving state again (there is no reserved memory in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game in which the special display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). As an example, both the return success effect and the return failure effect may be an effect in which a combination of different decorative patterns is stopped and displayed after executing an effect that teases whether or not the time-saving state will be controlled again as a common effect.

In the above embodiment, as a performance corresponding to the small win fluctuation, a big win teasing performance that suggests that the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 controlled to an open state in the small win game state will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 and that the game ball will pass through the big win area 063AK19 and the miss area 063AK21 may be configured to be executable, and a rescue performance that suggests that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 and will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state after a miss performance that suggests that the game ball did not pass through the big win area 063AK19 may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

For example, as a jackpot teasing effect, as shown in FIG. 12-38(a), a performance may be configured to be executable in which a jackpot teasing image AK19 including a jackpot suggesting image AK20 showing a message "jackpot" and suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, and a miss suggesting image AK21 showing a message "miss" and suggesting that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this case, as a miss effect, a performance may be executed in which the miss suggesting image AK21 included in the jackpot teasing image AK19 is highlighted as shown in FIG. 12-38(b) based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20. In the state shown in FIG. 12-38(b), the frame of the miss suggesting image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame of the jackpot suggesting image AK20 that is not highlighted, so that the miss suggesting image AK21 is highlighted. After performing the performance operation shown in FIG. 12-38(b) as a miss performance, as a rescue performance, as shown in FIG. 12-38(c), a message "Time-saving" is displayed in part of the area where the miss suggestion image AK21 is displayed, a time-saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed to suggest that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20, and the highlighting of the miss suggestion image AK21 is ended and a performance that highlights the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 12-38(c), the frame of the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 and the miss suggestion image AK21, which are not highlighted, so that the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the normal processing of the special pattern shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12-11, after determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" (step 063AKS106), when it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the special pattern display result is not determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only one example, and the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit" can be executed in any order. For example, after executing the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit", when it is not determined in the process that the special pattern display result is a "small hit", the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" may be executed. Alternatively, the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" may be executed simultaneously with the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "big hit" and the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "small hit."

In the above embodiment, it has been explained that only one of the game balls that enter the large prize opening 063AK4 in a small prize game state flows down through the distribution section supply path 063AK8 to the distribution section 063AK18, and the game balls other than that one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is merely one example, and it is also possible to configure the game so that multiple game balls that enter the large prize opening 063AK4 in a small prize game state enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. Such a configuration can increase the interest in the game.

When configured in this manner, after one game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 and passes through one of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, and the miss region 063AK21, at least one other game ball may enter the distribution unit 063AK18 and pass through another of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, and the miss region 063AK21. In this case, the game state after the end of the small win game state may be controlled based on whether the game ball that first entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passed through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the miss region 063AK21 among the multiple game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 during the small win game state. For example, if the game ball that first enters the distribution unit 063AK18 in a small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, even if other game balls pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 after that passage, the game state can be controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state ends based on the fact that the first game ball passed through the big win area 063AK19.

Alternatively, the game state after the end of the small win game state may be controlled based on whether the last game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 among the multiple game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small win game state passed through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. For example, if the last game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, even if other game balls passed through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 before the passing, the game state may be controlled to the big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the last game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19.

Alternatively, a priority order may be set in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, and when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 in a small win game state pass through a plurality of areas among the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, the game state after the small win game state ends may be controlled based on the passage of the game balls through the area with the highest priority among the areas through which they have passed. For example, the priority order of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority order of the time-saving area 063AK20, and the priority order of the time-saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority order of the miss area 063AK21. In this case, when multiple game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, respectively, the game ball is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game state ends based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big win area 063AK19, which has the highest priority.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the time-saving state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize winning port 063AK4, which has been controlled to be open in the small win game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. However, this is merely one example, and in the time-saving state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize winning port 063AK4, which has been controlled to be open in the small win game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the period controlled to the time-saving state can be extended by controlling the state to the time-saving state for a predetermined period after the small win game state ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

In this case, a display may be configured to be executable that notifies the player that the period controlled to the time-saving state has been extended based on the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 while in the time-saving state. Such a configuration can increase interest in the game. For example, a time-saving count recovery display that increases the number of time-saving times indicated by the time-saving count notification image AK16 may be executed as a display that notifies the player that the period controlled to the time-saving state has been extended.

In this case, when the time-saving state is active, instead of a time-saving passage prompting effect that suggests passage through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the miss region 063AK21 without suggesting passage through the time-saving region 063AK20 (suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the miss region 063AK21 without suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving region 063AK20), a normal time passage prompting effect that suggests passage through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20 and the miss region 063AK21 (suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20 and the miss region 063AK21). This configuration can increase the interest in playing games.

In the above embodiment, as a presentation corresponding to the small win fluctuation, a presentation suggesting whether the game ball that enters the large prize opening 063AK4 controlled to be in an open state in the small win game state will pass through the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 may be configured to be executable during the execution of the small win fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" where the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the big hit area 063AK19 is executed during the small hit variation, if the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" where the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 is executed during the small hit variation, and if the small hit type is "small hit E" where the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 is executed during the small hit variation.

In the above embodiment, the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect were described as being started after the small win fluctuation has ended, the small win start effect has ended, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening has started. However, this is merely one example, and the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect may be configured to be able to start while the small win fluctuation is being executed. Such a configuration can increase the interest in playing the game. In particular, if the normal time passing prompting effect can be executed while a small win fluctuation is being executed, by displaying the normal time passing prompting image AK1 while a small win fluctuation is being executed, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a big win game state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 during the small win game state, the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state, and the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 during the small win game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed in which a time-saving area passing notification image AK13 showing a message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, a failure area passing notification effect is executed in which a failure area passing notification image AK17 showing a message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. However, this is merely one example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state may be any effect different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. For example, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 may be illuminated, whereas when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 may not be illuminated (turned off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification sound indicating the message "Time-saving!" may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the notification sound may not be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having a jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving area 063AK20, and a miss area 063AK21, but this is merely one example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to have a time-saving area 063AK20, but not have a jackpot area 063AK19 or a miss area 063AK21. Such a configuration can reduce manufacturing costs.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to have a plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20. In this case, depending on which of the plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball has passed through in the small win game state, the device may be configured to be controlled to a time-saving state for different periods after the small win game state ends. For example, the time-saving area 063AK20 may be configured to have a first time-saving area and a second time-saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time-saving area in the small win game state, the device may be controlled to a time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends, while when the game ball passes through the second time-saving area in the small win game state, the device may be controlled to a time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed one time after the small win game state ends. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to which of the multiple time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball will pass through during a small win game state, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the low probability low base state as the normal state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends. However, this is merely one example, and it may be configured such that in the high probability low base state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends.

Any part or all of the above configurations may be combined with each other in any manner.

Each configuration of feature 063AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations of the other features, as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of the other features, as appropriate.

For example, the feature 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature 063AK, during a first period of a predetermined effect such as a normal time passing prompting effect, a time-saving time passing prompting effect, or a reach effect such as Super Reach A to Super Reach C, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and during a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined effect may be configured to be output by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means at the same speed for the performance sound in both the first period and the second period. With this configuration, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed of the effect sounds corresponding to the specified effects such as the normal time passing prompting effect, the time-saving time passing prompting effect, and the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C does not change between the first and second periods, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 063AK is
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of controlling a player to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103, etc.) capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that has a special area (e.g., a time-saving area 063AK20) and can be controlled between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to a variable display;
The variable means is controlled to the first state when a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern, etc.) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result (e.g., FIG. 12-6, FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, etc.),
The state control means includes:
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and the variable means is controlled to the first state, if the game medium passes through the special area, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the passage (e.g., FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-26, etc.);
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the variable means is controlled to the first state, if the game medium passes through the special area, no control based on the passage is performed (for example, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-26, etc.);
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances in a case where the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, and in a case where the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state, and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state (e.g., FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, FIG. 12-36, etc.).
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, appropriate control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The variable means has a specific area (for example, a big win area 063AK19, etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the game medium to the advantageous state when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-26, etc.),
The effect execution means is capable of executing the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area or the special area in the special state (e.g., FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-36, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2) relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The performance execution means can execute different performances when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, FIG. 12-36, etc.),
This may be done.
This configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances during execution of the variable display when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state (e.g., Figures 12-8, 12-9, 12-15, 12-16, 12-19, 12-33, 12-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (4) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect (e.g., a time-saving suggestion effect, etc.) that suggests that the special display result is controlled to the special state as an effect that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state during execution of the variable display (e.g., Figs. 12-8, 12-9, 12-15, 12-16, 12-19, 12-33, 12-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, a variety of effects can be implemented, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (5) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
A variable display of the first identification information (e.g., a first special game, etc.) and a variable display of the second identification information (e.g., a second special game, etc.) can be executed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second identification information, the special state is controlled at a higher rate than when the special display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information (e.g., FIG. 12-14 , etc.),
This may be done.
According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 064AK)
The characteristic portion 063AK includes the characteristic portion 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 064AK is
In a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103, etc.) capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that has a specific area (e.g., a big win area 063AK19) and a special area (e.g., a time-saving area 063AK20) and can be controlled between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to a variable display;
The state control means includes:
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the game medium passing through the specific area (for example, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-26, etc.),
The game medium can be controlled from the normal state to the special state based on the passage of the special area (for example, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-26, etc.),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (such as a normal passing-through effect) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state (e.g., FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-10, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, etc.),
When the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the state control means does not control the game medium to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state (for example, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-26, etc.),
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, appropriate control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The performance execution means includes:
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special performance is executed (for example, FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-10, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, etc.),
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific performance (e.g., a time-saving time-passing incentive performance) is executed to suggest passage of the specific area without suggesting passage of the special area (e.g., FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-10, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-36, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The performance execution means can execute different performances when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, FIG. 12-36, etc.),
This may be done.
This configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the above (3) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The variable means is controlled to the first state when a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern, etc.) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result (e.g., FIG. 12-6, FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, etc.),
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances during execution of the variable display when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state (e.g., Figures 12-8, 12-9, 12-15, 12-16, 12-19, 12-33, 12-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the above (3) or (4) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect (e.g., a time-saving suggestion effect, etc.) that suggests that the special display result is controlled to the special state as an effect that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state during execution of the variable display (e.g., Figs. 12-8, 12-9, 12-15, 12-16, 12-19, 12-33, 12-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, a variety of effects can be implemented, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines according to (3) to (5) above relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing different effects when the game medium passes through the specific area and when the game medium passes through the special area when the special display result is derived as a variable display result and the variable means is controlled to the first state and then controlled to the second state (e.g., FIG. 12-8, FIG. 12-23, FIG. 12-24, FIG. 12-31, FIG. 12-34, FIG. 12-36, etc.).
This may be done.
According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the presentation that is executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 065AK)
The characteristic part 065AK will be described. In the characteristic part 065AK, the description of the parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description, after being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to control it to a high base state (time-saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, when in the low base state (normal state), if the display result of the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 20 becomes a predetermined "time-saving pattern" among "normal pattern misses", it is controlled to the high base state (time-saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special pattern. This allows the game to transition from the low base state to the high base state without passing through the jackpot gaming state, providing an element of surprise in the game.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a "time-saving pattern," the state transitions from a low base state to a high base state even if the variable display of the special pattern is being performed.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 65AK1 with feature part 065AK can execute a predetermined effect that suggests or notifies the player of the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern. The predetermined effect can suggest or notify the player that the display result of the normal pattern will be a "normal hit" or a "time-saving pattern," or that the display result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot." Such a predetermined effect can make the player anticipate which display result will be suggested or notified, increasing the player's interest.

(Configuration of characteristic part 065AK)
Fig. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK has a different layout of some components from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description shown in Fig. 1. Note that here, mainly the parts that are different from Fig. 1 will be described, and the same components will be assigned the same numbers and will not be described.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 with characteristic part 065AK shown in FIG. 13-1, the game ball launched from the ball launching device is guided to the lower side of the game area via the first path, which is the path on the left side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, or the second path, which is the path on the right side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, and either enters (enters) each winning hole or is taken into the outlet without entering any winning hole.

Shooting a game ball so that it passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called a left hit, and shooting a game ball so that it passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5 is called a right hit. The area to which a game ball hit from the left can be guided is called the left area, and the area to which a game ball hit from the right can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is located below the image display device 5 in the left area of the game area, as in the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic explanation, while the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are located below and to the right of the image display device 5 in the right area of the game area. Therefore, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) is open, and in the jackpot game state where the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port) is open, the game is played by hitting from the right, and in the low base state where the winning port is not open, the game is played by hitting from the left.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the pass gate 41 is provided in the left and right areas, so that the normal game can be easily played even in a low base state where the game is played by hitting from the left. This ensures that in the low base state, the display result of the normal pattern becomes a "time-saving pattern", and there is an opportunity to transition to a high base state.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the general winning opening 10 is provided in the left area and the right area. Note that the general winning opening 10 may be provided in either one of the areas.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the game area, and the attacca lamp 9c is provided in a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK will be described. FIG. 13-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S26 of FIG. 5. In the normal symbol process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 has been turned on, i.e., that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), it executes the gate switch passing process (step S412).

In the gate switch passing process of step S412, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the gate passing memory counter (gate passing memory number) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the CPU 103 increments the count value of the gate passing memory counter by +1, extracts the value of the random number for determining normal symbols, which is a software random number, and stores it in a storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number. The CPU 103 also increments the number of lit normal symbol reserve indicators 25C by 1. After that, depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes in steps S400 to S404 as shown below.

In the normal processing of normal symbols in step S400, if the state is such that the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol display device 20 is not displaying the normal symbol variation and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the gate passing memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the value of the normal symbol winning judgment random number stored in the storage area and the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 13-3 to determine whether or not there is a win (whether or not the stopped normal symbol is to be the winning symbol) and whether or not it is to be the time-saving symbol. If the game state is in a low base state (if the time-saving flag is not set), the table shown in FIG. 13-3 (A) is used, and if it is in a high base state (if the time-saving flag is set), the table shown in FIG. 13-3 (B) is used. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 starts the normal symbol process timer by setting the normal symbol process timer to a value equivalent to the variable display time (normal symbol variation time) from when the normal symbol is variably displayed until it is derived and displayed. The CPU 103 also executes control to send a command specifying the start of normal symbol variation to the performance control board 12. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("2" in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes the variable display (variation) of the normal pattern in the normal pattern variation process of step S402. Then, it checks whether the normal pattern process timer has timed out, and if so, updates the value of the normal pattern process flag to a value (in this example, "3") indicating the normal pattern stop processing (step S403).

In the normal pattern stop processing of step S403, the CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 20. Then, the normal pattern process timer is started by setting a value equivalent to the normal pattern pattern determination time (stop pattern display time) to the normal pattern process timer, and when the timer times out, it is confirmed whether the stopped normal pattern is a winning pattern or not. If it is not a winning pattern (if it is a losing pattern), if it is a time-saving pattern, a process for starting the time-saving state is executed. Also, if it is not a winning pattern (if it is a losing pattern), the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "0") indicating the normal pattern normal processing (step S400). If the stopped normal pattern is a winning pattern, the normal pattern process timer is started by setting a value equivalent to the normal electric role opening time to the normal pattern process timer. Then, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "4") indicating the normal electric role opening processing (step S404).

The CPU 103 opens the variable winning ball device (normal electric device) 6B during the normal electric device open process in step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the CPU 103 closes the variable winning ball device 6B and updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

Figure 13-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal pattern determination table in which a judgment value is set regarding the normal pattern display result that determines the display result of the normal pattern in the normal normal pattern processing of step S400. In this embodiment, the range that the normal pattern judgment random number can take is 1 to 250, and a judgment value is set in the normal pattern determination table to be compared with the normal pattern judgment random number value.

Figure 13-3 (A) shows the normal symbol determination table used in the low base state. As shown in Figure 13-3 (A), in the low base state, if the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a win (normal symbol win). If it is determined to be a normal symbol win, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 5 seconds. If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a miss (normal symbol miss). If it is determined to be a normal symbol miss, the variable winning ball device 6A is not in an open state. In the case of a normal symbol win or a normal symbol miss, the normal symbol change time is 10 seconds, and the symbol determination time is 0.5 seconds.

In addition, if the random number value for determining the normal pattern is between 231 and 240, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving pattern A). If it is determined to be time-saving pattern A, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter an open state, but is controlled to a high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving pattern A, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 10 seconds.

Also, if the random number value for determining the normal pattern is between 241 and 250, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving pattern B). If it is determined to be time-saving pattern B, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter an open state, but is controlled to a high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving pattern B, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbol is part of a miss (a regular miss), and part of the judgment value corresponding to a regular miss is assigned to the time-saving symbol.

In addition, in the normal processing of the normal symbols in step S400, after judging (determining) whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol, a judgment is made as to whether or not to make it a time-saving symbol. By doing this, in cases where a normal symbol is both a winning symbol and a time-saving symbol is judged due to a random number error, etc., the normal symbol can be prioritized. Note that in a low base state, since it is more advantageous for the player to have a time-saving symbol than a normal symbol, it is also possible to first judge whether or not to make it a time-saving symbol, and then judge whether or not to make it a normal symbol.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving patterns are provided, and the period of the high base state (ending condition, number of time-saving times) differs between when time-saving pattern A appears and when time-saving pattern B appears. As shown in FIG. 13-4 (A), when the display result of the normal pattern becomes "time-saving pattern A" in a low base state, the high base state continues until the special pattern changes 50 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 50). Also, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes "time-saving pattern B" in a low base state, the high base state continues until the special pattern changes 100 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 100). Therefore, time-saving pattern B is more advantageous for the player than time-saving pattern A.

In this embodiment, whether or not a time-saving pattern is to be used in the event of a normal miss and the type of time-saving pattern are determined by the random number value for determining normal patterns, but a different random number may be used to determine whether or not a time-saving pattern is to be used and the type of time-saving pattern. Also, the number of types of time-saving patterns is not limited to two, and there may be one type or three or more types. When there is one type of time-saving pattern, the process of determining the display result is made easier by determining whether or not a time-saving pattern is to be used by the random number value for determining normal patterns.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(A), the pattern determination time for normal hits and misses is 0.5 seconds, while the pattern determination time for time-saving patterns is longer at 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the pattern determination time for time-saving patterns, it is possible to execute notifications for a transition to a high base state (time-saving state) or a right hit during the pattern determination time, thereby preventing or reducing a sudden transition to a high base state that puts the player at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation. Note that the pattern determination time may be constant regardless of the display result.

The change time when the time-saving pattern B is displayed is 15 seconds, and when other display results are displayed is 10 seconds. This allows the display result to be predicted by the change time of the normal pattern. The change time may be determined according to the display result, or the change time for all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

Figure 13-3 (B) shows a normal symbol determination table used in the high base state. As shown in Figure 13-3 (B), in the high base state, if the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 1 to 229, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 7.5 seconds. If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 230, it is determined to be a miss (normal symbol miss). If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 231 to 240, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving symbol A). If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 241 to 250, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving symbol B). Even if the time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol A, B) appears in the high base state, as shown in Figure 13-4 (B), the number of time-saving times (termination condition of the high base state) is not updated, and the high base state is not affected during control. In other words, in the high base state, the time-saving pattern is treated the same as a normal miss. If it is determined to be a normal miss, the variable winning ball device 6A will not be in the open state.

When in a high base state, regardless of the display result, the normal pattern change time is 1.5 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 0.5 seconds. This allows the normal pattern to change repeatedly and quickly.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-3, the change time is determined according to the display result of the normal pattern, but the change time (change pattern) of the normal pattern may be determined based on the display result of the determined normal pattern. In this case, if the display result is a normal miss, the determination ratio of the change time may be different depending on whether or not it is a time-saving pattern. In this way, it is possible to suggest whether or not it will become a time-saving pattern depending on the change time of the normal pattern.

As shown in Figures 13-3 (A) and (B), the time required for the time-saving symbol in the high base state to be determined is 0.5 seconds, whereas the time required for the time-saving symbol in the low base state to be determined is longer at 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the time required for the time-saving symbol in the low base state, a notification that the player will transition to the high base state (time-saving state) or hit to the right can be issued during the pattern determination time, which can prevent or reduce the player from suddenly transitioning to the high base state and being at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation. Also, since such a notification is not necessary even if the display result of the normal symbol is a time-saving symbol in the high base state, by shortening the pattern determination time, the next normal symbol can be changed quickly. Note that the pattern determination time may be constant regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is also controlled after the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 13-5(A), "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as jackpot types when the display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, and after the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" is reached, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 50 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 50), and after the jackpot game state of "jackpot B" is reached, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 100). The display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot basically when the base state is low. Also, as shown in FIG. 13-5(B), when the display result of the second special chart is a jackpot, a "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, and after the "jackpot C" jackpot game state is reached, the high base state continues until the special chart changes 100 times (the number of time-saving cycles becomes 100). Note that the display result of the second special chart is basically a jackpot when the high base state is reached.

In this way, in this embodiment, the end conditions (number of time-saving cycles) of the high base state (time-saving state) are more favorable when the display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot than when the display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. This prevents the end conditions of the high base state from being disadvantageous to the player when the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and transitions to the high base state, thereby reducing disappointment for the player. Also, during a high base state, the end conditions of the high base state (time-saving state) in the event of a jackpot are more favorable than those of the low base state, making it easier to maintain the high base state for a long time once the high base state has been reached.

In addition, in the feature part 065AK, it is sufficient that the game is controlled to at least the time-saving state after being controlled to the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" and the presence or absence of the probability variable control can be arbitrary. Also, the jackpot types and the number of time-saving times shown in FIG. 13-5 are examples, and there may be more or fewer jackpot types than in FIG. 13-5, or the number of time-saving times may be the same for all, for example.

Figure 13-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing when a normal pattern stops in step S403 in Figure 13-2. In the processing when a normal pattern stops, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001). The normal pattern is displayed from the time the display result is derived and displayed until the pattern confirmation time has elapsed. In other words, the pattern confirmation time can be said to be the period from the time the display result of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the next change in the normal pattern begins. If it is the pattern confirmation time, the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set.

If the normal pattern confirmation display flag is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the normal pattern (confirmed normal pattern) is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20 (step 065AKS002), and a setting is executed to send a normal pattern stop designation command that designates the stop of the normal pattern fluctuation to the performance control board 12 (step 065AKS003). In step 065AKS003, the normal pattern stop designation command according to the display result is set so that the display result of the normal pattern can be specified on the performance control board 12. Then, the game state (high base state, low base state) and the pattern confirmation period according to the normal pattern display result (see Figure 13-3) are set (step 065AKS004), and the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS005). After that, the normal pattern stop processing is terminated.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol confirmation period has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the processing of step 065AKS011, for example, a timer value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted and it is determined whether it has become 0. If the symbol confirmation period has not elapsed (step 065AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the pattern determination period has elapsed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether the display result is a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012). If the display result is a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal pattern process timer is set to the normal electric role opening time (step 065AKS013), the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value indicating processing during the opening of the normal electric role (e.g., "4") (step 065AKS014), and processing when the normal pattern has stopped is terminated.

If the display result is not a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether the display result is a time-saving pattern (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time-saving pattern (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether the high base state is present by determining whether the time-saving flag is set (step 065AKS016). If the high base state is not present (step 065AKS016; No), it is determined whether the jackpot game state is present by, for example, checking the value of the special pattern process flag (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, if the jackpot game state is present, the state is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, so that the transition to the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern is not performed. In addition, if the special pattern is changing and the display result of the change is a jackpot, the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state based on the jackpot ends, so it is possible not to transition to the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern.

If the game is not in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS018), and the time-saving count counter is set to the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol (see FIG. 13-4 (A)) (step 065AKS019). This allows a transition to the high base state (time-saving state). In addition, in response to the transition to the time-saving state, settings are made to send a game state designation command specifying that the game is in the time-saving state to the performance control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

If the display result is not a time-saving pattern but a normal miss (step 065AKS015; No), if the game is in a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), if the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or after the processing of step 065AKS020 has been executed, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value indicating normal processing of normal patterns (e.g., "0") (step 065AKS021), and the processing when the normal pattern stops is terminated.

Figure 13-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance control process processing (step S76) shown in Figure 8 of characteristic part 065AK. In addition to the performance control process processing of the basic explanation shown in Figure 9, the performance control process processing of characteristic part 065AK also includes a general map linked performance control process (step 065AKS1) and a time-saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) after the advance notice setting process (step S161).

Figure 13-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol linked performance control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the performance control process of Figure 13-7. The normal symbol linked performance is a performance that suggests and notifies the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the normal symbol variation. The normal symbol linked performance is included in the predetermined performance. In the normal symbol linked performance control process, control is performed to execute the normal symbol linked performance.

In the normal picture linking performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the normal picture linking performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS031). The normal picture linking performance execution flag is set when the execution of the normal picture linking performance is started as a specified performance. If the normal picture linking performance execution flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it checks whether the special picture linking performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special picture linking performance execution flag is set when the execution of the special picture linking performance is started. In this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a special picture linking performance that suggests and notifies the display result of the special picture in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the special picture (decorative picture) as a specified performance. The special picture linking performance will be described later. If the special chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, if a special chart linked performance is being executed as a specified performance, a new specified performance (regular chart linked performance) will not be executed, and the regular chart linked performance control process will end.

If the special symbol linked performance execution flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not a normal symbol change start command has been received (step 065AKS051). If a normal symbol change start command has not been received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol linked performance control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol variation start command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the high base state is present by determining whether or not the sub time-saving flag is on (step 065AKS052). When the high base state is present (step 065AKS052; Yes), the frequency of normal symbol variation is high and the display results are almost always normal hits, so the normal symbol linked performance control process is terminated without executing the normal symbol linked performance.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not it is in the jackpot game state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the performance control process flag. In that case, it is considered to be in the jackpot game state when the value of the performance control process flag is 6 or more. If it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), in order not to interfere with the performance during the jackpot and because it will be controlled to the high base state after the jackpot game state ends, the normal map linked performance control process is terminated without executing the normal map linked performance.

If the game is not in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, the fluctuation is being executed according to a fluctuation pattern accompanied by the Super Reach, and it may be determined by whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation exceeds the start timing of the Super Reach. If the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), the normal map linked effect control process is terminated without executing the normal map linked effect in order to draw attention to the reach effect of the Super Reach. Note that the normal map linked effect may not be executed even during the execution of effects other than the reach effect of the Super Reach (such as the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the action effect of the movable body 32, and effects with a high expectation of a jackpot).

If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern is determined according to whether or not to execute the normal symbol linked effect and the effect type if executed (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (B), whether or not to execute the normal symbol linked effect and the predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the normal symbol specified by the normal symbol variation start command.

Figure 13-8 (C) is a diagram showing the predetermined performance patterns. The predetermined performance is a performance that suggests and notifies the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern, and the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal pattern and the special pattern will be a miss, the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "normal hit", and the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "time-saving pattern". The predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns that suggest that the special pattern will be a jackpot pattern, and the expected probability of a jackpot is higher for the predetermined performance pattern SP5 than for the predetermined performance pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined performance of all the predetermined performance patterns starts in the same manner, and then the result according to the predetermined performance pattern is notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined performance pattern SP1 suggests a miss, it can be expected that the start of the performance will be another predetermined performance pattern.

In addition, after suggesting the display result or the display result of the special pattern, a false pattern may be set to suggest that it will be a miss. For example, after displaying an image such as "Maybe it's time-saving?" to execute an effect suggesting that the display result of the normal pattern will be a time-saving pattern, a pattern may be set to display an image such as "Too bad" to indicate that it will not be a time-saving pattern.

The predetermined performance patterns corresponding to the normal map linked performance are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the execution of the normal map linked performance and which of the predetermined performance patterns SP1 to SP3 will be selected are determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-8 (B). As shown in FIG. 13-8 (B), when the display result of the normal pattern (normal map display result) is "normal map hit", the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is high, when it is "normal map miss", the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is high, and when it is "time-saving pattern A" or "time-saving pattern B", especially when it is "time-saving pattern B" with a large number of time-saving times, the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is high. This allows the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) to suggest and notify the normal map display result. Note that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-8 (B) is one example, and any ratio may be used as long as the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) can suggest and notify the normal map display result. In addition, a predetermined presentation pattern other than the predetermined presentation patterns SP1 to SP3 may be set as a predetermined presentation pattern for the normal map linked presentation.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064). If it has not been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064; No), the normal map linked performance control process ends.

If it has been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064; Yes), the normal map linked performance timer is set to a value corresponding to the execution time of the normal map linked performance according to the decision result (predetermined performance pattern) in step 065AKS059 (step 065AKS078). Then, the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) is started based on the performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the normal map linked performance, the normal map linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS080), and the normal map linked performance control process is terminated.

If the normal map linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the normal map linked performance timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and it is determined whether the value of the normal map linked performance timer has become 0 (step 065AKS035). If the value of the normal map linked performance timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the normal map linked performance control process is terminated.

When the value of the normal map linked performance timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the normal map linked performance is ended (step 065AKS036), the normal map linked performance execution flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037), and the normal map linked performance control process is ended.

Figure 13-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special chart linked performance determination process for determining whether or not to execute a special chart linked performance as a predetermined performance and the predetermined performance pattern when it is executed. The special chart linked performance determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process shown in Figure 13-7 before the decorative pattern starts to change. In the special chart linked performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the normal chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS091). If the normal chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, if the normal chart linked performance is being executed as the predetermined performance, the special chart linked performance determination process is terminated since a new predetermined performance (special chart linked performance) is not executed. If the normal chart linked performance execution flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is checked whether or not the high base state is in place by determining whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on (step 065AKS092). If the base state is high (step 065AKS092; Yes), the average special chart change time is short and the period for executing the special chart linked performance cannot be secured, so the special chart linked performance is not executed and the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated.

The special chart linked performance determination process is executed when the decorative pattern starts to change, so the special chart linked performance is not determined and executed in the case of a big win game state or a small win game state. If the high base state is not in place (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether the current start of the change is a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern (step 065AKS093). It is possible to determine whether the change pattern is a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern by checking the change pattern specified by the change pattern designation command. If the change pattern is not a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern (step 065AKS093; No), the special chart linked performance determination process is terminated. In this way, in this embodiment, if the change pattern is not accompanied by a Super Reach, the special chart linked performance is not executed, but even if the change pattern is not accompanied by a Super Reach, the special chart linked performance (for example, the specified performance of the specified performance pattern SP1) may be executed at a specified rate.

If the fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach Miss or Super Reach Big Hit (Step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined presentation pattern is determined according to whether or not to execute a special symbol linked presentation and the presentation style if executed (Step 065AKS094). In Step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (B), whether or not to execute a special symbol linked presentation and the predetermined presentation pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined performance patterns corresponding to the special chart linked performance are SP1, SP4, and SP5, and in step 065AKS094, the execution of the special chart linked performance and the predetermined performance pattern SP1, SP4, or SP5 are determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-9 (B). As shown in FIG. 13-9 (B), when the special chart display result is a "jackpot", the predetermined performance pattern SP5 is determined at a high rate, and when the special chart display result is a "miss", the predetermined performance pattern SP4 is determined at a high rate. As a result, the predetermined performance pattern SP5 has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the predetermined performance pattern SP4. The predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by a super reach, so when the special chart linked performance of these predetermined performance patterns is executed, it is possible to notify that a super reach will occur. Also, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-9, a jackpot may occur even when the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is selected, so a performance with a sense of surprise can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-9(B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special chart linkage effect (predetermined effect) can suggest and notify the special chart display result. In addition, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be set as the predetermined effect pattern for the special chart linkage effect.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided not to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095). If it has been decided not to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095; No), settings are made to execute the special chart linked performance corresponding to the determined predetermined performance pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern is set as usage data in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Then, the special chart linked performance execution flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated.

Figure 13-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the performance control process of Figure 13-7. The time-saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the user of a transition to the time-saving state when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern and the high base state (time-saving state) is controlled accordingly.

In the time-saving notification setting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a regular pattern stop designation command specifying that the time-saving pattern has stopped has been received (step 065AKS101). If a regular pattern stop designation command specifying that the time-saving pattern has stopped has not been received (step 065AKS101; No), the time-saving notification setting process ends.

If a normal symbol stop command specifying that the time-saving symbol has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time-saving flag is on to confirm whether the high base state is in effect (step 065AKS102). If the high base state is in effect (step 065AKS102; Yes), control based on the time-saving symbol being activated is not executed, and the time-saving notification setting process is terminated.

If the high base state is not reached (step 065AKS102; No), the sub time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS103). The sub time-saving flag is also set to the ON state when the jackpot game state ends and control is exercised to the time-saving state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS104). If the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state, and the time-saving notification setting process is terminated without notifying the gamer that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state.

If the jackpot game state is not reached (step 065AKS104; No), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed at a specified position on the image display device 5 (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS106). If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), settings are made to start a notification of the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving transition notification) and a notification of the right hit (right hit notification) (step 065AKS107).

Also, if the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), a setting is made to start a right-hit notification at the start of the next fluctuation (step 065AKS108). Thus, in this embodiment, when the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed, in order to draw attention to the reach performance of the Super Reach, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, and the right-hit notification is executed at the next fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach performance of the Super Reach from being hindered. Note that the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may not be executed even during the execution of a performance other than the reach performance of the Super Reach (such as a notice performance on the image display device 5, a performance of the movable body 32, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, etc.). Also, although the time-saving state may have already been entered at the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving transition notification may be executed at the next fluctuation.

Although the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, the right-hit display is displayed, so that at the very least it is possible to indicate that the transition has been made to the time-saving state, reducing the disadvantage suffered by the player due to not being able to grasp the game state.

After executing the processing of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time-saving notification setting process ends.

Figure 13-11 is a timing chart showing the effects when the time-saving transition occurs. In Figure 13-11, "Special pattern change" ON indicates that the special pattern is changing, and OFF indicates that the special pattern is stopped. "Regular pattern change" ON indicates that the regular pattern is changing, and OFF indicates that the regular pattern is stopped. "Right-hit image" ON indicates that the right-hit image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right-hit image is not displayed.

Figure 13-11 (A) is a timing chart for when the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed when the time-saving symbol stops. As shown in Figure 13-11 (A), when the time-saving symbol stops as a result of the display of the normal symbol while the special symbol is changing, the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification are executed. Also, the right-hit image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Then, the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, and the time-saving control will start when the next normal symbol starts to change. In this way, by executing the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification during the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol before the time-saving control actually starts, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that they will be transitioning to the time-saving state and that they will be playing by hitting to the right, even if they are transitioning to the time-saving state while the special symbol is changing.

Figure 13-11 (B) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed when the time-saving pattern stops. As shown in Figure 13-11 (B), when the super reach occurs during the fluctuation of the special pattern, and the time-saving pattern stops as a result of the display of the normal pattern during the reach effect of the super reach, the right-hit image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving pattern stops, but the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification are not executed. Then, the right-hit notification is executed at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by the super reach. Note that if the timing of the next fluctuation start is after the pattern determination time of the time-saving pattern, the time-saving state is already in effect, so in this embodiment, when the time-saving pattern stops during the reach effect of the super reach, the time-saving notification is not executed at the start of the next fluctuation. On the other hand, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in Figure 13-11 (B), if the pattern determination time of the time-saving pattern has passed after the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

In addition, if the timing of the end of the special pattern change that is being performed when the time-saving pattern stops is before the time for the time-saving pattern to be determined, which is the timing when the time-saving control actually starts, there is no need to hastily execute the time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification while the current special pattern is changing, so the time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification may be executed in the period after the start of the next special pattern change but before the time for the time-saving pattern to be determined has passed.

Next, an example of the performance of the characteristic part 065AK will be described. Figures 13-12 to 13-14 show an example of the performance of the predetermined performance of the characteristic part 065AK. In Figure 13-12 (A), a downward arrow indicates that the decorative pattern is being changed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". A small pattern that is always visible to the player is also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a predetermined performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, a predetermined performance (normal pattern linked performance, special pattern linked performance) is executed in the predetermined performance area 65AK11. The predetermined performance area 65AK11 may be displayed on the image display device 5 at all times, or may be displayed when the predetermined performance is executed. For example, the predetermined performance area 65AK11 may be erased in a high base state or a jackpot game state in which the predetermined performance is not executed.

When it is decided to execute a specified performance, as shown in FIG. 13-12(B), a performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance begins. In FIG. 13-12(B), a downward arrow indicates that the performance image is being scrolled. After that, the performance result according to the specified performance pattern is announced.

When the specified performance pattern SP1 is selected, as shown in FIG. 13-12(C), an "X" performance image is displayed in the specified performance area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified performance has failed and that the expected probability of the normal or special pattern display being a winning combination is low.

When the specified performance pattern SP2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (D), a "○" performance image is displayed in the specified performance area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified performance has been successful and that the normal pattern is a winning combination.

When the specified performance pattern is SP4, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (E), a musical note performance image is displayed and stops in the specified performance area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified performance has been successful, and that there is a high probability that the special symbol will result in a jackpot, or that a super reach will be executed.

When the specified effect pattern is SP5, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (F), an effect image of the character "Heat" is displayed in the specified effect area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful, and that there is a high probability that the special symbol will result in a jackpot, or that a super reach will be executed.

In the case of the specified performance patterns SP4 and SP5, for example as shown in Figures 13-12 (E) and (F), decorative symbols of the same number stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and after a reach is reached, the performance result of the specified performance (a performance image of a musical note or the character "heat") is displayed. By doing this, if a specified performance is executed during a reach, it can be expected that a super reach will occur.

The predetermined performance patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as normal pattern linked performances, and the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as special pattern linked performances. The normal pattern linked performances are executed regardless of the change in the special pattern (decorative pattern), so they can be executed at any timing while the special pattern (decorative pattern) is changing.

Figure 13-13 shows an example of the performance operation when the specified performance (normal symbol linked performance) of the specified performance pattern SP3 is executed. Figure 13-13 (A) shows that the decorative symbols are changed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a specified performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center part of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute a specified performance, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B), a performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance begins.

If the specified effect pattern is SP3, as shown in FIG. 13-13(C), the "hour" effect image is displayed and stops in the specified effect area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful and that the normal pattern display will be a time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving pattern stops, as shown in FIG. 13-13(D), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit right is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and a time-saving transition notification is executed in which an image of the words "Entering time-saving mode!" is displayed in the center portion of the image display device 5. At this time, the number of times the time-saving mode has been activated is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed in response to the time-saving pattern B being activated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-13(E), a right-hit notification is executed, in which an image of the text "Aim to the right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-13(F), the right-hit notification image is erased, and the right-hit notification ends. At this time, the "time" effect image is also erased in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Thus, in this embodiment, even if the special pattern (decorative pattern) is fluctuating, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern, the time-saving state is transitioned to. In that case, a predetermined effect that notifies the time-saving pattern that it will stop can be executed, and a time-saving transition notification or a right-hit notification as shown in FIG. 13-13(D) and (E) is executed, so that the transition to the time-saving state can be conveniently notified. This allows the player to continue playing without confusion.

Figure 13-14 shows an example of the performance operation when a specified performance (normal symbol linked performance) of the specified performance pattern SP3 is executed during the reach performance of a super reach. Figure 13-14 (A) shows that the decorative symbols showing the number "7" have stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C have changed, resulting in a reach. Small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a specified performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center part of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the specified performance, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), the performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance starts. At this time, the reach performance of the super reach starts on the image display device 5.

If the specified effect pattern is SP3, as shown in FIG. 13-14(C), the "hour" effect image is displayed and stops in the specified effect area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful and that the normal pattern display will be a time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol stops during the Super Reach performance, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit right is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but no time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification is given on the image display device 5, and the Super Reach performance continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-14(E), the decorative symbol showing the number "6" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle, resulting in a miss. At this time, the "hour" effect image is also erased from the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-14(F), as the next decorative symbol starts to change, a right-hit notification is executed in which an image of the words "Aim right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. At this time, the number of time-saving times is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed in response to the time-saving symbol A. Note that here, the time-saving state was entered during the previous change, and as one change has been consumed, the number of time-saving times has been reduced from 50 to 49.

In this embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern during the reach performance of the Super Reach becomes a time-saving pattern, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, and the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed with priority. If the Super Reach results in a jackpot, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, even if a time-saving transition notification is executed during the reach performance of the Super Reach, there is a possibility that the notification will be wasted or the performance will be uninteresting, so the reach performance of the Super Reach is prioritized. And if the display result is a miss, a right-hit notification is executed at the time of the next change, so that it is possible to appropriately notify that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state and that a right hit will be performed. In addition, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern during the reach performance of the super reach, and the display result of the change accompanying the super reach becomes a jackpot, the notification corresponding to the display result of the normal pattern becoming a time-saving pattern (time-saving transition notification, right-hit notification) may not be executed, or a notification corresponding to the display result of the normal pattern becoming a time-saving pattern may be executed in the first change after the end of the jackpot game state.

(Modification of characteristic part 065AK)
This characteristic part is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The process contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts shown in the above embodiment and modified examples, and the method of determining various effects are only examples, and any method may be used as long as it can achieve the same effect as the above embodiment and can perform the effects shown in the above embodiment. In addition, the example of the performance operation shown in the above embodiment is only an example, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it can achieve the same performance effect. In addition, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. In addition, this characteristic part may be combined with other characteristic parts as appropriate.

When the display result of the special pattern is read in advance and a pre-reading preview performance is executed, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance may be restricted. For example, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern, the pre-reading preview performance may not be executed until the time-saving pattern stops and the game transitions to the time-saving state. In addition, the display result of the normal pattern before the start of the fluctuation is read in advance, and if there is reserved data of a normal pattern that will become a time-saving pattern, the pre-reading preview performance that predicts the display result of the special pattern may be restricted. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game state from being changed after the pre-reading preview performance is executed, which changes the fluctuation pattern between the time of the pre-reading and the time of the actual fluctuation execution, and causes it to become inconsistent with the performance content of the pre-reading preview performance.

In addition to the jackpot signal (output during a jackpot) and special prize signal (output during a jackpot and during time-saving), a time-saving signal (output only during time-saving) may be provided as a signal to be output externally to the hall computer or data display device.

In the above embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern in the jackpot game state, control to the time-saving state is not performed, but if a jackpot occurs in a low base state, control to the time-saving state may be performed based on the time-saving pattern in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot. In this case, the order is jackpot game state start → time-saving control start based on the time-saving pattern → jackpot game state end, and the base changes before and after the jackpot game state. Therefore, the setting of the number of time-saving times based on the control to the jackpot game state may be performed at the start of the change after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the number of time-saving times when a jackpot occurs in a low base state is 50 times or 100 times, and the number of time-saving times when a jackpot occurs in a high base state is 100 times, if the time-saving pattern stops during the jackpot game state, the number of time-saving times after the jackpot game state ends is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time-saving times when the fluctuation starts after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to make an appropriate state transition even if the game state changes during the jackpot. Note that when the jackpot game state is reached, the number of time-saving times may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time-saving times may be determined at a fixed rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effects (normal pattern linked effects, special pattern linked effects) that suggest or notify the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern were effects that scrolled the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 to display the effect result (Figs. 13-12 to 13-14), but any effect that can suggest or notify the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern may be used. In addition, the predetermined effect may be an effect that at least suggests or notifies whether or not a normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern, or the display result of a special pattern.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state, the number of time-saving times is not updated, but if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state, the number of time-saving times may be updated or added. Also, the number of time-saving times and the determination ratio of the number of time-saving times may be different when the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a low base state and when the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state.

In the above embodiment, the execution of the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification was restricted in certain cases, such as during the reach performance of a super reach, but if a transition to a time-saving state occurs in response to a time-saving pattern being reached, regardless of the performance content during execution, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may be executed. For example, if the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are executed on a display means other than the image display device 5, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may be executed regardless of the performance content on the image display device 5.

(Means relating to characteristic part 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 065AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that performs variable display of special identification information (e.g., special symbols), and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) in which a gaming medium is likely to enter a special variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7 (a big winning hole)) based on the result of the variable display of the special identification information becoming a specific display result (e.g., a big winning symbol),
A variable control means (e.g., CPU 103 for executing the process of step S404) for performing a variable display of normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols), and changing the normal variable means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port)) to a predetermined state (e.g., open state) in which the game medium can easily enter the normal variable means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port)) based on the result of the variable display of the normal identification information becoming a predetermined result (e.g., a normal winning pattern);
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state based on the variable display result of the normal identification information becoming a special result (e.g., a time-saving pattern) different from the predetermined result (e.g., executing the process of step 065AKS018),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP4, a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP5, a special picture linkage effect) that suggests that a variable display result of the special identification information will be the specific display result, and a special effect (e.g., a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP3, a normal picture linkage effect) that suggests that a variable display result of the normal identification information will be the special result,
The state control means is capable of controlling from the normal state to the special state (for example, executing the processing of step 065AKS018) even if the variable display of special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of normal identification information becomes the special result.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately, and interest in the game can be increased.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined notification means for performing a predetermined notification (for example, a time-saving transition notification, a right-hit notification) based on the normal variable means changing to the predetermined state;
It may also be possible to provide a predetermined notification limiting means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 065AKS106 and 065AKS108) that limits the predetermined notification depending on the performance content during the variable display of the special identification information.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the presentation during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect execution means may be capable of executing an effect that suggests that, in the normal state, the variable display result of the normal identification information will be the specified result, the variable display result of the normal identification information will be the special result, or the variable display result of the special identification information will be the specific display result (for example, capable of executing a specified effect of specified effect patterns SP1 to SP5; Figures 13-12 and 13-13).
According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display results of both the normal identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The state control means can control the state to the special state based on the fact that the state control means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 13-5 );
When starting the variable display of the special identification information after control to the advantageous state, the termination condition of the special state, which is controlled based on control to the advantageous state, may be made different depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state.
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is confirmed may be longer (for example, Figure 13-3 (A)) than when the variable display result of the normal identification information is the specified result.
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the normal state, the time from when the special result is displayed as a variable display result of the normal identification information to when it is determined may be longer than when the special state is selected (e.g., Figures 13-3 (A) and (B)).
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration of the characteristic portion may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other characteristic portions as appropriate. The combined characteristics or individual uncombined characteristic portions may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other characteristic portions as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the characteristic part 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 14-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 14-1, the sound control board 13 in the present characteristic part 079SG is equipped with a sound synthesis IC 079SG132 that cooperates with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the sound synthesis CI 079SG132, and a sound data ROM 079SG133. The performance control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 based on a performance control command from the main board 11, and causes the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data individually for each speaker 8L, 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 and outputs them to each speaker 8L, 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each speaker 8L, 8R, which is associated with sound number data and is used to output sounds corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds. In other words, this control data is a collection of data including sound data that chronologically describes the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period).

Figure 14-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape with a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns, reach effects, operation promotion effects and still image display effects described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 079SG005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D that can display the first reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U that can display the second reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, and a caption display area 079SG005T that can display a caption indicating the game status.

In other words, the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb becomes the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are display areas that display information related to the game (reserved display, subtitle display, display of the fourth symbol, and display of the number of reserved memories) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, closer to the first display area 079SG005F. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this characteristic part 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 079SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 079SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a height that is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5, and a left-right width that is the same as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are much shorter than the height H and left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5.

For this reason, in this characteristic part 079SG, the area of the first display region 079SG005F relative to the entire display region of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described below, which allows each pending display to be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (C), in the caption display area 079SG005T, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the caption operation process (see FIG. 14-13) described below, which makes it possible to display a message according to the game status or the presentation being performed (for example, if a specific reach presentation is in progress, a message according to the presentation status such as "XX mode in progress!") while moving from left to right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3).

When the characters included in the message corresponding to the game status reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the game status is displayed while moving in the caption display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game status is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T, making it easier for the player to recognize the current game status.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T may each be rotated and moved at different constant speeds.

As shown in FIG. 14-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a regular interval to indicate that the special symbol is being variable displayed. Also, if the variable display result is a miss, both of these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end of the variable display, whereas if the variable display result is a jackpot or miss, both are lit (ON) at the end of the variable display.

The display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the display of the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb are displays that change only when a new reserved memory occurs and when a new variable display starts. In other words, unlike the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T, the display mode of the display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change except when the variable display starts.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figures 14-3 (A) to 14-3 (D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data that is drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (to the left of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display images of chance-up effects, still image display effects, and operation promotion effects, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (C), image data 3 is data that is drawn to display variable decorative symbols and reach effects in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in Fig. 14-3(A) to Fig. 14-3(C), display priorities are set for these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1, and lowest for image data 3 (image display priority on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). In other words, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower (lowest layer) than images based on image data 1 and image data 2. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 14-3(D), on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over images based on image data 2 and image data 3.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image at the lowest hierarchical level, and therefore at least a portion of the image based on image data 3 may be difficult to see or impossible to see due to the image based on the first data and the image based on image data 2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images with a constant progression speed, while images based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images or still images with multiple progression speeds based on data previously stored in the CGROM.

In particular, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, during the reach performance of a super reach, the video of the reach performance can be displayed at the normal progression speed V1 and at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. This is because data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 and data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store in advance only the data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 in the CGROM, and perform a specified process on that data to make it possible to display part of the performance video of the reach performance at the progression speed V2.

In this way, in this characteristic part 079SG, the video progression speed, which is the speed at which the presentation video changes, is set to V1, resulting in a non-slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a first speed that is fast, and the video progression speed is set to V2, which is slower than V1, resulting in a slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a second speed that is slower. In other words, the slow motion video, which is a presentation video with a slow presentation progress speed in this characteristic part 079SG, may be a video whose video progress speed is slower than the non-slow motion video, which is displayed before the slow motion video and has a video progress speed of V1.

In addition, in this characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach performances is exemplified (see Fig. 14-18 to Fig. 14-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the performance video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach performance is the same as the content of the super reach performance shown in Fig. 14-18 to Fig. 14-25, but by executing a super reach performance in which the video progression speed does not change from V1 to V2, in other words, there is no slow motion period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a slow motion period has begun in the super reach performance shown in Fig. 14-18 to Fig. 14-25.

In other words, when a super reach performance is executed in which the content of the performance video is the same but the video progression speed does not change to V2, the performance video with the second speed slower than the first speed in this invention corresponds to a performance video with the same content that is displayed at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, and thus is displayed for a longer period of time than a non-slow motion super reach performance.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, the image progression speed of the effect video is slowed down to create a slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly, and an example is given in which the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to create a pseudo-slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly by not changing the image progression speed of the effect video (keeping it at V1) and instead speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R and the light emission cycle of game effect lamp 9.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means, including a display means capable of displaying effect videos, and by making the speed at which the effect is performed by at least one of these effect output means differ between slow motion periods and non-slow motion periods, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect being performed is in slow motion during the slow motion period.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the display of the reach effect video is always executed at a progression speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the progression speed of the display of the reach effect video during the slow motion period may be variable (for example, the progression speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progression speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

Figure 14-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 079SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-4 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 14-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature part 079SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 079SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 079SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 14-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature part 079SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature part 079SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 14-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 079SG will be explained using FIG. 14-7 (B). In this feature section 079SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state, and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a jackpot that repeats 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a jackpot that repeats 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "probable chance jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable chance jackpot, and "non-probable chance jackpot" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probable chance jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature part 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or variable probability jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 079SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this feature section 079SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, .... Also, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided in the super reach fluctuation pattern, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature part 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small winning".

As shown in Figure 14-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 14-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature 079SG. In this feature 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-9, if the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (super reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, if the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table have different numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5, respectively, and in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 30 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5, respectively. In other words, in this feature part 079SG, when the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the Super Reach β type fluctuation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win jackpot, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation patterns in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 079SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14-8, the reach effect of super reach α1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the first reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of super reach α2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of super reach α3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed and then the second reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot), as shown in Figures 14-8 and 14-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the second reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the first reach performance is performed.

The reach effect of Super Reach β1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the third reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of Super Reach β2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach β3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and then the fourth reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot being expected), as shown in Figures 14-8 and 14-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the fourth reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the third reach performance is performed.

Note that, in this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the second reach performance is always executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance is always executed after the third reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the second reach performance and the fourth reach performance are executed by themselves.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach performance can be executed in a combination of the first reach performance and the second reach performance, and also in a combination of the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where the reach performance is executed in combinations other than these (for example, a combination of the first reach performance and the fourth reach performance, the second reach performance and the third reach performance, etc.).

In addition, in this feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally set to have a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) than the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and some of the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) may have a lower jackpot expectation rate than any of the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 079SG is provided with a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 14-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 14-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 079SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 079SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 079SG151C, a game control flag setting section 079SG152, a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 079SG190 as shown in Figure 14-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in Figure 14-11 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 079SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 079SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made in the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A, and when a start win is made in the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 14-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 14-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIG. 14-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the on state (step 079SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting part 079SG154. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 079SGS104; Y), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS106).

After executing either step 079SGS103 or step 079SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 (step 079SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, settings are made to send the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 079SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 079SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 14-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the performance control process processing in this feature part 079SG. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), then updates the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a hold display operation process (step 079SG162) to operate (rotate display) the hold display displayed in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to perform a telop operation display in the telop display area 079SG005T, and executes a fourth pattern display process (step 079SG164) to perform a variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J, and then executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 depending on the value of the performance control process flag.

Figure 14-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 9. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stopping symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stopping symbol. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a small win, the stopping pattern is determined from among the chance combinations "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a loss, the stopping pattern is determined to be a decorative pattern of three mismatched patterns, a combination other than the chance combinations described above (a loss pattern).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277). If the change pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; Y), the process executes a chance up performance decision process (step 079SGS278) to decide whether to execute a chance up performance in the latter half of the first reach performance or the latter half of the third reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-15, if the variable display result is a miss, there is a 20% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 80% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 20% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. In other words, in the variable display of the reach of this feature part 079SG, when the chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the chance up effect is not executed.

In this feature section 079SG, as shown in Figures 14-27 and 14-32, only one presentation pattern is provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple presentation patterns may be provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, and the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on which presentation pattern the chance up effect is executed with.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Figures 14-27 and 14-32, there is only one timing for starting the Chance Up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple timings for starting the Chance Up effect may be provided, and the probability of winning may differ depending on which timing the Chance Up effect starts from.

After determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), a still image display effect determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed to determine the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image that was displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the second reach effect to the start of the notification effect (jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect), and proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 100%, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 80%, and pattern SG-2 with a probability of 20%.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (B), still image display pattern SG-1 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and still image display pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and then the color of the still image is changed.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach presentation is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the still image display presentation is executed with pattern SG-2 (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a Super Reach α3 in step S079SGS281 (step S079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step S079SGS283. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS281; Y), the process executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step S079SGS282) for determining the presentation pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach presentation, and then proceeds to step S079SGS283.

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 14-17(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 80% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 20% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 14-17 (B), operation promotion presentation pattern SS-1 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and operation promotion presentation pattern SS-2 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in a larger size than pattern SS-1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5.

In other words, as for the operation promotion effect in this characteristic part 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2), there is a higher probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect will be executed) than when a normal-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Therefore, the player can be drawn to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In step 079SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute each of the aforementioned chance-up performances, still image display performances, operation promotion performances, etc., and selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the performance pattern and the variable pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 079SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this feature section 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) from the value of the process timer each time the variable display performance processing is executed, and determines whether the process timer after the subtraction has timed out. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 and Super Reach β1 to β3 in this feature part 079SG will be explained based on Figures 14-18 to 14-35.

First, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 shown in FIG. 14-18, FIG. 14-19, and FIG. 14-26(A) to FIG. 14-26(G), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of a decorative pattern starts at a normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at a normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at a normal playback speed V4.

In the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper and lower patterns 079SG005Ja and 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light (blink) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a fixed cycle. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this characteristic section 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinked or lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking or lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Fig. 14-18, Fig. 14-19, Fig. 14-26(A) to Fig. 14-26(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the first reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the first reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from the aforementioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when ally character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α1, when the first reach performance first half execution period ends, as shown in FIG. 14-18 and FIG. 14-26(E) to FIG. 14-26(G), a video of ally character A's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination to notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-26(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing the part where friendly character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-26 (E)), and the animation showing the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-26 (F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and controlling the jackpot game state is displayed again at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-26 (G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3 variable display, when the first half of the first reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 14-19 and 14-26 (D), ally character A's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the first reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 14-19 and Figure 14-27 (A) to Figure 14-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 14-27 (B). The chance-up effect is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character A punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when ally character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance ends, as shown in Figure 14-19 and Figure 14-27 (E) to Figure 14-27 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after friendly character A's attack fails and he is defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification performance is displayed, and the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination to notify that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 during the part where ally character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 14-20, 14-21, and 14-27 (D), ally character A's attack is successful and defeats enemy character A during the second half of the first reach performance execution period. Then, the game moves to the first half of the second reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figures 14-20, 14-21, and 14-28(A) to 14-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the battle performance progresses and the second half of the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance is reached, as shown in FIG. 14-20, FIG. 14-21, and FIG. 14-28(C), as an effect performance, converging lines start to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and a video of ally character A attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video starts, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character A is displayed in slow motion punching enemy character B.

In addition, during the period when the attack of the friendly character A towards the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the moving image of the battle performance in the first display area 079SG005F is moving at a speed of V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed at a constant moving speed of V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking period of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking period of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking period becomes faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (D), the number of convergence lines as the effect performance described above is gradually increased.

In other words, during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect, the progression speed of the battle effect video slows down to V2, causing the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F to increase and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 to become more intense. This increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 makes it possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle effect (whether a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, after the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 14-20, 14-21, and 14-28 (E), the image displayed at the end of the battle effect (in this feature part 079SG, the image displayed immediately before friendly character A's attack hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect.

During the execution of the still image display effect, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 returns to the cycle before the progression speed of the battle effect video slowed to V2.

When pattern SG-2 is determined as the presentation pattern for the still image display presentation, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle presentation is inverted as the still image display presentation, as shown in FIG. 14-29(A) to FIG. 14-29(E). After the still image display presentation with the inverted color ends, the jackpot notification presentation is notified that the attack of ally character A hits enemy character B, and that enemy character B will be defeated and then controlled to the jackpot game state. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification presentation, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and the images of the jackpot notification presentation are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-29(F), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in FIG. 14-20, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the animation of friendly character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, while the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. Then, the animation of decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progression speed V1. In particular, when decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not inverted as the still image display effect, and a jackpot notification effect as described above is executed as shown in Figures 14-30(A) to 14-30(D), or a miss notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 14-30(F) to 14-30(H).

In the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the jackpot notification effect is the same as the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. As shown in FIG. 14-20, the animation of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, but the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. After enemy character B falls, it is displayed at a progression speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed V3, and the BGM and effect sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the miss notification effect is that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character A and ally character A falls, the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 14-21, the loss notification effect is a video of friendly character A's attack not hitting and being defeated by enemy character B, which is displayed at a progression speed of V1. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4, without any change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(I), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed stationary in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

Next, for the variable display of Super Reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 14-22, 14-23, and 14-31(A) to 14-31(H), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of decorative symbols starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at regular intervals, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at regular intervals.

As shown in Fig. 14-22, Fig. 14-23, Fig. 14-31(A) to Fig. 14-31(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the third reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the third reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A is started to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance ends, as shown in FIG. 14-22 and FIG. 14-31(E) to FIG. 14-31(G), a video of ally character B's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then it is notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing friendly character B's successful attack is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-30(E)), and the animation showing the enemy character being defeated thereafter is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-30(F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and the player being controlled to a jackpot game state is displayed again at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 14-30(G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3 variable display, when the first half of the third reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 14-23 and 14-31 (D), ally character B's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the third reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 14-23 and Figure 14-32 (A) to Figure 14-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach effect execution period begins, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the presentation video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up presentation may be executed as shown in FIG. 14-32 (B). The chance-up presentation is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the presentation video of the battle effect.

In particular, on the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the chance up effect video, while the chance up effect video is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols (the "7" displayed at the top left and right of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 14-32 (B)). Therefore, in this feature part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance up effect, the player can recognize that a variable display is being performed by visually checking the small symbols, and by displaying the chance up effect video with priority over the decorative symbols, an area for displaying the chance up effect video on the image display device 5 can be reliably secured.

In this feature section 079SG, the chance-up effect animation is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols may be displayed with priority over the chance-up effect animation. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which decorative symbol combination the currently executing reach effect has developed from, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character B punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach β2, when the execution period of the latter half of the third reach performance ends, as shown in Figure 14-23 and Figure 14-32 (E) to Figure 14-32 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after ally character B's attack fails and he is defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification performance is displayed, and it is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and in the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed without lighting (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed without lighting).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, then as shown in Figures 14-24, 14-25, and 14-32 (D), ally character B's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated during the second half of the execution period of the third reach performance. Then, the game moves to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 14-24, 14-25, and 14-33(A) to 14-33(B), when the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach effect is entered, the battle effect between ally character AB and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character B begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 14-24, 14-25, and 14-33 (C). When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character B punching enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character B towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes faster).

In other words, during the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the speed of the battle effect animation slows down to V2, causing the game effect lamp 9 to blink more intensely, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the battle effect (whether a big win notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, an operation prompting effect is executed. If the effect pattern of the operation prompting effect is determined to be pattern SS-1, an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba resembling the shape of the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, along with a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B and an effect image 079SG005E. The updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are then started. As mentioned above, these operation prompting effect images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 14-3), and are therefore displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the meter 079SG005M is updated to notify the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged and updated. Note that since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transparency (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can see the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and the visibility of the battle effect is reduced compared to when the operation prompting effect is not being executed. Since the execution of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at a progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 14-33 (D) and 14-33 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-34(A) to FIG. 14-34(E), when the presentation pattern of the operation prompting presentation is determined to be pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, which is larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba as an operation prompting image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is also displayed, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Note that, as described above, these operation prompting presentation images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 14-3), and therefore are displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle presentation.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the update display of the meter 079SG005M notifies the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb conceals most of the image of the battle effect. As mentioned above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image that is larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and has a transparency of 0%. Therefore, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 14-34 (D) and 14-34 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, or if the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (if the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends), the jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect will be executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or when the operation prompting effect ends.

As shown in Figures 14-24 and 14-35(A) to 14-35(C), the big win notification performance after the operation promotion performance is a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B, which is displayed at a progressing speed V1, while the video of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progressing speed V2. The video after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progressing speed V1. During the big win notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progressing speed V3, while the background music and performance sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-35(D), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in FIG. 14-25 and FIG. 14-35(E) to FIG. 14-35(G), the miss notification effect after the operation prompting effect is that the attack of ally character B does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character B and ally character B falls, it is notified that the game state is not controlled to a jackpot. In particular, when the miss notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

As shown in FIG. 14-25, the loss notification effect is a video that is displayed at a speed of V1 until the attack of ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a speed of V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-35(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

As shown in Fig. 14-26(H), Fig. 14-27(H), 10-29(F), Fig. 14-30(E), Fig. 14-30(I), Fig. 14-31(H), Fig. 14-32(H), Fig. 14-35(D), and Fig. 14-35(H), this characteristic part 079SG illustrates an example in which, at the timing when the variable display ends, the caption display area 079SG005T including the caption (message) is displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. At the timing when the variable display ends, the caption display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5, but the display of the caption (message) itself in the caption display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, in the variable display of Super Reach α3 and Super Reach β3, an example has been given in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened only during the slow motion period immediately prior to the notification effect (the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V2), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately prior to the notification effect. Also, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during part of the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V1 (non-slow motion period).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 14-19 to 14-25, during the first half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V1, and during the second half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. Therefore, while the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, it is possible to increase the degree of empathy of the player with the ally character displayed during the reach performance and to increase the sense of anticipation for the execution of the jackpot notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first and second half of the first, second, third, and fourth reach performances, the output of background music and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R remains unchanged and is output at the normal playback speed of V4, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output unit in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so that highly reproducible background music (music), sound effects, and other performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume during variable displays, including when reach effects are being performed, and when jackpot games are being played, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-20, 14-21, 14-24, and 14-25, during the second half of the second reach effect and during the second half of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than normal, so that the game effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progression speed of the effect video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. In this way, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification performance will soon be executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing during the first reach performance to the fourth reach performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-19 to 14-25, during the execution of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the progression speed of the reach performance video changes between V1 and V2, while the rotation speed of the reserved display and the movement speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4, which further prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so that while each reach effect is being executed, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and captions displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-18 to 14-25, during periods other than when the reach effect is in progress, the rotation display of the reserved display is performed at a rotation speed V3 in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the moving display of the caption is performed at a moving speed V3 in the caption display area 079SG005T. In other words, the rotation display of the reserved display and the moving display of the caption are performed at the same speed as when the reach effect is in progress, which prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the reserved display and the caption.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C), when the characters contained in the caption (message) in the caption display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, so that the entire caption (message) is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T. This allows the player to always recognize the entire moving display of the caption in the caption display area 079SG005T.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the entire caption is constantly displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be times when part of the caption that is displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T is not visible to the player.

Also, as shown in Fig. 14-20, Fig. 14-21, and Fig. 14-28, during the second half of the execution period of the second reach effect, the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2 and an effect effect of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the second half of the execution period of the second reach effect, and thus increasing the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 14-28(C) and Fig. 1-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, making it easier for the player to recognize that the second reach effect has ended and a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed due to the increase in the number of concentrated lines displayed.

In this feature section 079SG, an example is given of the effect presentation of the present invention being the display of converging lines, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effects such as the movement of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the output of specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. may be executed as effect presentations, and the effectiveness of the effect presentations may be successively increased as the second reach presentation (battle presentation) progresses (for example, the movement range of the movable body 32 may be widened, the volume of the specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R may be increased, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself may be increased, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-26 (G), 14-29 (E), 14-30 (D), 14-31 (G), and 14-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. This further increases the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa, while making it easier for the player to recognize that they are being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when a jackpot notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved memory display area 079SG005Sa may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. When the display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T are displayed, an image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, overlapping with the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T).

In addition, at this time, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T may be made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and only one of the reserved displays displayed in these reserved display areas may be made invisible, thereby improving the visibility of the jackpot notification image.

As shown in Fig. 14-28 and Fig. 14-29, during the second half of the second reach effect, a still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while as shown in Fig. 14-20 and Fig. 14-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in Fig. 14-2 (C) continue without stopping. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved display is being displayed or the telop is being moved during the execution period of the still image display effect, and prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the display of the reserved display or the telop due to the rotation display of the reserved display or the moving display of the telop being stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-16 and 14-29(A) to 14-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed using pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted, so that the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by the inversion of the color of the still image.

In this feature section 079SG, as a still image display effect, a form in which the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a form in which the color of the still image is changed may be one in which the color of the still image is changed to black and white, one in which only a portion of the color of the still image is changed, or one in which a new color is added to the still image.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed with pattern SG-2 and the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, the colors of the pending display and caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, so the player can easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed by comparing the pending display, caption, fourth pattern, etc. displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa with the still image.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, followed by a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, and a pattern in which the variable display ends after the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, resulting in a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the display of the performance video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 during the first reach performance or the third reach performance and then transitions to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, or whether or not a notification is given that the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or the third reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 and then the performance is controlled to the jackpot game state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-19, 14-20, 14-21, 14-23, 14-24 and 14-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the first half execution period of the third reach performance are executed simultaneously at a progression speed V1, so that it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for being controlled into a jackpot game state due to the progression speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance being different from the progression speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 14-18, 14-20, 14-22, 14-24, 14-25, 14-26(E) to 14-26(G), 14-29(C) to 14-29(E), 14-30(B) to 14-30(D), 14-31(E) to 14-31(G), and 14-35(A) to 14-35(C), in the big win notification performance of the feature 079SG, a video of an enemy character falling down due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is displayed at a progression speed V2, while Figs. 14-19, 14-21, 14-22, 14-23, 14-24, 14-25, 14-26(E) to 14-26(G), 14-29(C) to 14-29(E), 14-30(B) to 14-30(D), 14-31(E) to 14-31(G), and 14-35(A) to 14-35(C), As shown in 4-23, FIG. 14-25, FIG. 14-27(E) to FIG. 14-27(G), FIG. 14-30(F) to FIG. 14-30(H), FIG. 14-32(E) to FIG. 14-32(G), and FIG. 14-35(D) to FIG. 14-35(F), in the miss notification effect, the video of the friendly character falling is displayed at a progression speed of V1, so when the miss notification effect is executed, the video of the miss notification effect is not displayed at a progression speed of V2, which prevents the player from becoming overly dissatisfied and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result of the Super Reach results in a miss notification effect, an example is shown in which the display video of the miss notification effect is displayed at a progression speed V1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in some of the variable displays of the Super Reach, the display video of the miss notification effect may be displayed at a progression speed V2 that is slower than V1. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the presentation of the miss notification effect, and to increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic section 079SG, the progress speed V1 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the third speed in the present invention, and the progress speed V2 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-24 and 14-25, when the video display of the reach effect is being executed at a progression speed V2 during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the operation prompting effect is executed, so that the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation prompting effect.

In this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the display of the fourth reach effect is executed at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V1 while the operation prompting effect is being executed. Furthermore, a suggestion effect that suggests that the operation prompting effect will be executed before the operation prompting effect is executed may be executed, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V2 while the suggestion effect is being executed.

As the operation prompting effect of this characteristic part 079SG, in addition to the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect effect video at the progression speed V2 is continuously executed, but it does not progress to the notification effect. Furthermore, the same big win notification effect or miss notification effect is executed when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B and when the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. For this reason, the notification effect will not be executed before the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B due to the player not operating the push button.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is given in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be an operating means other than the push button 31B, such as a stick controller 31A, or a sensor capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or touch sensor.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-18, 14-20, 14-22, 14-24, 14-26(E) to 14-26(G), 14-29(C) to 14-29(E), 14-30(B) to 14-30(D), 14-31(E) to 14-31(G), and 14-35(A) to 14-35C, in the jackpot notification presentation in this feature section 079SG, the animation of the part where the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 14-19, Fig. 14-21, Fig. 14-23, Fig. 14-25, Fig. 14-27(E) to Fig. 14-27(G), Fig. 14-30(E) to Fig. 14-30(G), Fig. 14-32(E) to Fig. 14-32(G), Fig. 14-35(D) to Fig. 14-35(F), the animation of the miss notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG is displayed at a progression speed V1, and is not displayed at a progression speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at a progression speed V2, so that the player can be impressed that the big win game state is being controlled.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which the color is inverted) as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result in this invention is a jackpot, so that the player can be drawn to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect is inverted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, in this feature section 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention may be an effect other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, or an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.).

In addition, the operation promotion presentation of this characteristic part 079SG can be executed in either of two presentation patterns: pattern SS-1, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and pattern SS-2, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb that is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion image that imitates push button 31B. When the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is visible through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, whereas when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is concealed by the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba, so the visibility of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, so that the player can pay attention to whether the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-25, and FIG. 14-33(C) to FIG. 14-33(E), when an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation promotion effect, the display of the battle effect video is executed at a progression speed V2 while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is being displayed, which can increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb reduces the visibility of the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) that is being displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) completely invisible. Also, during the period in which the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation prompting effect pattern SS-2, the display of the fourth reach effect's performance video may be executed at a progression speed V1 (non-slow motion).

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, as the reach performance of the super reach, the second reach performance can be executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance can be executed after the third reach performance. Furthermore, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half of the execution period of the first reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half of the execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half of the first reach performance period after the first half of the execution period of the first reach performance, and the variable display of the super reach β2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half of the third reach performance period after the first half of the execution period of the third reach performance, It is possible to execute variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the second reach performance after the out-exchange part execution period, and variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the fourth reach performance after the third reach performance exchange part execution period. As shown in Figures 14-18 to 14-25, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half part execution period to the first reach performance second half part execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half part execution period to the second reach performance first half part execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half part execution period to the third reach performance second half part execution period, When transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, Since background music and sound effects are output from 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the first reach performance first half execution period transitions to the first reach performance second half execution period, when the first reach performance second half execution period transitions to the second reach performance first half execution period, when the third reach performance first half execution period transitions to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when the third reach performance second half execution period transitions to the fourth reach performance first half execution period. Furthermore, the display of the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, making it easier for the player to recognize the branching of the reach performances that he or she is drawing.

Note that, in the variable display of the Super Reach of this feature part 079SG, an example has been given in which two reach effects can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the Super Reach may be capable of executing three or more reach effects, or may be capable of executing only one reach effect.

The features 079SG of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance are provided as the reach performance of the super reach, and in all of these reach performances, a form in which a part of the performance video of the reach performance is displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2 in each reach performance (a pattern in which the performance video is always displayed at the progression speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the performance content may be different between the reach performance in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 and the reach performance in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the sound effects output from speakers 8L, 8R are always output at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether the display of the performance video is being executed at the progression speed V2 or not; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as modified example 079SG-1, in the first half of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output from speakers 8L, 8R at playback speed V4, the same as in the execution period of the first half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, while in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output at a playback speed different from V4 (for example, V5, which is slower than playback speed V4). By doing this, the playback speed of the sound effects can be changed while the reach effect video is being displayed at the progression speed V2, improving the effect of the sound effects on the reach effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIG. 14-33 and FIG. 14-34, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F during the execution period of the reach performance by displaying the effect image 079SG005E or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, while it is not possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in cases where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this manner, as shown in Figures 14-36 and 14-37, after the reach effect ends, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 14-36 (A) to 14-36 (D), when the second reach performance is being executed, once the second reach performance ends along with the still image display performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the centre of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification performance or miss notification performance, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed towards the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 14-36(E) and FIG. 14-36(F).

Also, as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) to 14-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, when the player operates the push button 31B, or when the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 14-37(E) and FIG. 14-37(F).

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in Figures 14-36 and 14-37 is an image based on image data 2 shown in Figure 14-3 (B), and by expanding the drawing range as an image based on image data 2, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while as shown in Figures 14-36 and 14-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea as part of the notification effect after the end of the second reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and Since the visibility of the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, the change in visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect will be displayed, and since the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty recognizing the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, etc.

In addition, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), and is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, thereby changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F. Therefore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, without changing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to precisely reduce the visibility of only 079SG005F, and because the rendering of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data is performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced, making it possible to make it difficult for the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb to change.

In addition, in this modified example 079SG-2, an example is shown in which the operation prompting effect is executed during the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed as part of the notification effect.

When the operation prompting effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in Fig. 14-38(A) to Fig. 14-38(F) as modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea in the same manner as modified example 079SG-2. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea has spread to cover the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in Fig. 14-38(D), the operation prompting effect is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect, with an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M.

The operation prompt image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M can be displayed as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 14-2 (A), thereby avoiding reduced visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After this, the player will be notified that they will be controlled to the jackpot game state or that they will not be controlled to the jackpot game state based on whether the player operates the push button 31B or the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as images of the first image data is not reduced, so the operation prompting effect can be made to stand out against the fourth reach effect, effectively encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the jackpot type of the jackpot may always be a variable jackpot (or even a variable jackpot A, which is the most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, a revival effect may be executed that notifies the player that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot state again after a miss notification effect is executed. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type may be a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot (a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a non-probability variable jackpot and a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a probability variable jackpot). By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a message indicating the game status is displayed as the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be a message indicating whether or not a variable display that is being executed or a variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game status, the title of the reach performance that is being executed, etc.

In addition, the characteristic section 079SG has been exemplified as a form in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the currently executing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be one that can identify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result in the currently executing variable display will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), an explanation of the currently executing effect (particularly a reach effect), a preview effect that can be executed from a timing before a reach effect, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, an example is given of a form in which an operation prompting effect (display of operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or operation prompting image 079SG005Bb) is executed during a period in which the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed after the reach effect video returns from a progression speed V2 to a progression speed V1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, an example of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this. As an operation prompting effect, it is not necessary to simply display an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb. For example, as a preliminary effect to displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, an effect may be executed in which the images of multiple push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped to display the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb.

When the effect of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B moving toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect to the operation prompt effect, for example, the speed of the movement display of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B may be slowed down as they approach the center of the image display device 5. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the operation prompt effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 14-20, 14-21, 14-24, and 14-25, when the display of the video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 may be different from when the display of the video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V1. For example, when the display of the video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V1, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in multiple colors, whereas when the display of the video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing this, when the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 14-20, 14-21, 14-24, and 14-25, when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, a sense of unity can be given to the display of the reach effect video and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 14-26, Fig. 14-29, Fig. 14-30, Fig. 14-31, and Fig. 14-35, the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation is exemplified as a form in which the decorative symbols are displayed while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot after the end of the reach presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for displaying the decorative symbols while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot may be during the reach presentation.

The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that allows the player to select at least a portion of the sound effects, such as background music, to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R during play by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In this way, if the player sets the output of sound effects to suit his/her preferences, when the video display of each reach effect is being executed at the progression speed V1, the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R will be played back at the playback speed V4 without changing, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the sound effects being played back at a speed slower than the playback speed V4, even if the player himself/herself has selected the sound effects to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as an end indication effect in the present invention, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character can be executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, and when this effect is executed, the variable display result is always a miss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, the display on the image display device 5 may be temporarily switched to the normal background image display before the reach effect, and then an effect indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, a revival effect) may be executed.

When executing the revival effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked before the video of the revival effect is displayed on the image display device 5, to make the player aware that the revival effect is being executed. Furthermore, the presentation mode of the revival effect may be, for example, an ally character attacking the enemy character again and defeating the enemy character. In particular, when executing the revival effect, a part of the video of the revival effect (for example, a video of a scene in which the enemy character is defeated) may be displayed at a progression speed V2 to enhance the presentation effect of the revival effect.

In addition, although this specification discloses multiple characteristic features and variations, the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these characteristic features and variations.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the probability of winning can be changed by changing the setting value as shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 9. In this case, for example, a pattern may be set in which the variable display result is a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1, and when a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 may be a miss at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 can be used as an indication that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that it is possible to attract the player's attention to the variable display result being a miss while suppressing a decrease in the player's interest due to the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, a pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the feature portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions such as the feature portion 063AK, the feature portion 065AK, and the feature portion 079SG. The combined feature portions or the individual feature portions not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, in addition to controlling the time-saving state by stopping and displaying the time-saving pattern as in the feature portion 059AK, the time-saving state may be controlled for a predetermined period after the small win game state ends based on passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 as in the feature portion 063AK. In addition, the time-saving state may be controlled even when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the normal pattern as in the feature portion 065AK. This increases the opportunities for control to the time-saving state, and improves the interest in the game.

In addition, for example, the time-saving prompting effect in feature part 059AK, the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect in feature part 063AK, the predetermined effect in feature part 065AK, and the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C may be set as the predetermined effect in feature part 079SG. Then, during a first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and during a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined effect may be configured to be outputted at the same speed for the performance sound by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means in both the first period and the second period. With this, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the effect sound does not change between the first and second periods, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command, etc.) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed, etc.).
When new judgment result information is received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the newly received judgment result information is further restricted (for example, when a reserve in which the variable display result is "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored reserve memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
moreover,
The game control system includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) capable of controlling the game to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means so that the numerical information corresponds to the special number of times. and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS71).

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving interest in the game. Furthermore, even if the game state changes and a variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued, and increasing motivation to play.

In other words, when the performance execution means receives judgment result information after receiving special information that can identify that the player is being controlled to a special state, it restricts the execution of the look-ahead performance based on the judgment result information. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the look-ahead performance actually reduces the player's interest in playing, such as when the player knows in advance that the judgment result information determined after the player is controlled to a special state is, for example, a judgment result that will result in the special state ending, by the execution of the look-ahead performance. In addition, since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than when the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and this increases the player's motivation to play. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to reduce the player's interest in playing when installed in an amusement facility and can increase the player's motivation to play.

The look-ahead notice may also be associated with the number of updates. For example, the look-ahead notice may be executed when the number of updates by the update means reaches a specific value corresponding to a specific number of updates. In this way, when the specific value is reached, there is an expectation of a jackpot, which increases interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that has state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and a part executing steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); a predetermined suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a notice performance) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-49, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120); and a control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. Examples of gaming machines include a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a background image changes as shown in Fig. 16-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in Fig. 16-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in Fig. 16-54 (C)) that notifies a player that a certain condition is about to be established (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in Fig. 16-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Fig. 16-44; see Fig. 16-50). Examples of the form of this gaming machine are described below as other examples.

(Other embodiment examples)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 15 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), an initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S909). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), an initialization process (step S908) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S905). In step S905, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were fluctuating, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the fluctuation of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 16-1 to 16-47.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 16-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in Fig. 1, a right-hit LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in Fig. 16-1. Also, as shown in Fig. 16-1, a right-hit notification LED 100IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 16-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the second special pattern. In this example, the fourth pattern display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged above and below, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by these two LEDs repeatedly turning on and off alternately.

As shown in FIG. 16-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic section 108IW, instead of the pass gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a pass gate 100IW41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. In this characteristic section 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the pass gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic section 108IW, since the probability of a normal hit increases in the probability of a special state or time-saving state, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (right-hitting operation) aimed at the right of the game area. On the other hand, in this characteristic section 108IW, in the normal state, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-hitting operation) aimed at the left of the game area.

(Probability of winning, probability of losing the time-saving feature)
FIG. 16-2 and FIG. 16-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the probability of a jackpot and the probability of a time-saving miss for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 16-2 shows the probability of a jackpot and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 16-3 shows the probability of a jackpot and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured to be able to set any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the probability of a jackpot is different), and it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value by executing a setting confirmation process or a setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 and FIG. 16-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting value is configured to be able to be changed to six stages from "1" to "6". It is to be noted that the setting is not limited to being able to be changed to six stages, and may be configured to be able to be changed to, for example, two to five stages or seven or more stages.

As shown in Figures 16-2 (A) and 16-3 (A), in both cases when the first special symbol variable display is executed and when the second special symbol variable display is executed, in a non-probability variable state (low probability state (normal state or time-saving state)), the setting value of "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2," setting value "3," setting value "4," and setting value "5," with setting value "6" having the highest jackpot probability of "242/65536" (approximately 1/270), making it the most favorable setting for the player.

As shown in Fig. 16-2(B) and Fig. 16-3(B), in both cases of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the high probability state (high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (about 1/32), which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "2420/65536" (about 1/27), which is the most favorable setting for the player. As shown in Fig. 16-2 and Fig. 16-3, in this example, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased by 10 times compared to the non-high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 16-2, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 164/65536 (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and regardless of whether the state is a special probability state or not). As shown in FIG. 16-3, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 328/65536 (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and regardless of whether the state is a special probability state or not). In other words, in this example, the judgment value for judging the time-saving miss is common regardless of the setting value.

Even if the jackpot probability is varied according to the setting value as described above while the loss probability without time-saving is constant, the number of judgment values for each setting value can be made consistent by varying the loss probability without time-saving for setting values "1" to "6" as shown in Figures 16-2 and 16-3.

The game may also be configured to be controllable to a small win game state. If the game is configured to be able to determine a small win as well, the game may be configured so that the probability of a small win is constant, regardless of the setting value, for example, between "1" and "6."

In addition, if the configuration is such that small wins can also be determined, it may be configured so that there is a small win with time reduction that is controlled to a time-saving state when a small win occurs.

The examples shown in Figures 16-2 and 16-3 are merely examples, and various modes are possible for setting the jackpot probability and the time-saving failure probability. For example, in this example, as shown in Figures 16-2 and 16-3, the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/400 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/200 when the second special symbol variable display is executed. However, conversely, it may be configured so that the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/200 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving failure probability is approximately 1/400 when the second special symbol variable display is executed.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 16-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 16-4(A) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 16-4(B) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-4(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," "variable jackpot," or "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," a "variable jackpot," or a "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

A "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 100-time variable display ends or the next jackpot occurs.

A "high probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a high probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends. When transitioning to the high probability jackpot state, the high probability jackpot state is maintained until the 100 variable display cycles are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the high probability jackpot state is controlled, the state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

A "sudden jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a 2-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends. When the jackpot state is transitioned to, the jackpot state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the jackpot state is controlled, the jackpot state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

In this example, in the case of a "normal jackpot" or a "probable jackpot", the large prize opening is controlled to be open in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game until 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this example) have entered (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a long period of time 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", the large prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a short period of time twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the large prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the game has suddenly switched to a probable jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 16-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 20% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot". Also, as shown in FIG. 16-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 55% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 5% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot".

(Time-saving type determination table)
Fig. 16-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, Fig. 16-5 (A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Fig. 16-5 (B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a time-saving miss symbol, in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C," based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 16-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a time-saving miss symbol, in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C," based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in Figures 16-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, and when the second special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, there is a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss A," a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss B," and a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss C."

The example shown in FIG. 16-5 is just one example, and various methods for determining the time-saving type are conceivable. For example, when the time-saving miss is determined based on the first special symbol changing display, the probability of determining "Time-saving miss C" is increased, while when the time-saving miss is determined based on the second special symbol changing display, the probability of determining "Time-saving miss A" is increased. In this way, the rate of determining the time-saving type may be different when the first special symbol changing display is executed and when the second special symbol changing display is executed.

In addition, for example, if the system is configured to be able to determine whether the time-saving feature has been lost even during a time-saving feature that has been used for rescue time-saving features, the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is not overwritten uniformly even if the time-saving feature has been lost, or the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is or is not overwritten depending on the type of time-saving feature that has been lost.

Figure 16-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of time-saving. As shown in Figure 16-6, in this example, in the normal state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 50 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 30 times. Also, in the time-saving state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled until the next big win, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times. Also, in the normal state and the time-saving state, if a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss during the special probability state. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss even during the time-saving feature due to the rescue time-saving feature. Also, in this example, as described later, after the rescue time-saving feature has been controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times, if no jackpot occurs even after the 800 fluctuation displays have ended, the rescue time-saving feature will again be controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times (rescue time-saving feature). Therefore, the number of times the time-saving feature has been controlled due to the rescue time-saving feature will essentially be until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K = (1-ML)n = {(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving miss occurs is not limited to that shown in FIG. 16-6. For example, even if the same time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control the number of time-saving times to be the same at 100 times during both the normal state and the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control the number of time-saving times to 100 times during the normal state and to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., the time-saving state falls back to the normal state). In this way, various modes are conceivable for controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving miss occurs.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
16-7 and 16-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. Among them, FIG. 16-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for a jackpot. Also, FIG. 16-7(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss in a normal state. Also, FIG. 16-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a jackpot. Also, FIG. 16-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss.

Also, FIG. 16-8 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 16-8 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving state. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 16-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 16-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

Figure 16-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Figure 16-8 (I) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table I for a miss in the fluctuation display that results in a rescue time reduction. Figure 16-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot in the fluctuation display that results in a rescue time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 16-7(A), in this example, when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-7(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Fig. 16-7 (C), Fig. 16-7 (D), and Fig. 16-8 (E), in this example, during the time-saving state, the rate at which fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than during the normal state. Furthermore, even during the same time-saving state, during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss, the selection probability of fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Furthermore, during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving state, the selection rate of fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the rate at which the variable display is executed using variable pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened variable) increases, shortening the period until the next jackpot is controlled, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in Fig. 16-7 (C), Fig. 16-7 (D), and Fig. 16-8 (E), in this example, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than in Fig. 16-7 (C), and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Also, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where the super reach is executed. In other words, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of the miss, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the time-saving is rescued (i.e., when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the super reach does not result in a miss, so the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, the time until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed. In this example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach is not executed when there is a miss, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate when there is a miss than in the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the big win. With this configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time-saving is started (i.e., when no big win has occurred for a long period of time), the rate at which the super reach will result in a miss is reduced, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-8(F), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is high at 95%. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-8(G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is high at 95%.

Also, as shown in Fig. 16-8 (F) and (G), if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is determined, and the Super Reach is not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the Super Reach fluctuation display is executed in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction but does not result in a jackpot. In addition, even if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, it may be determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β). For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) may be determined at a lower rate when there is a miss than in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction (i.e., the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in Fig. 16-7 (C)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 16-8 (H), in this example, during the special bonus state, there is a high probability of 90% that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) will be determined, and the average fluctuation time will be even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (I), in this example, when the display is a variable that results in a rescue time reduction and is a miss, the variable pattern is determined to be the variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing). In other words, the variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing) is not used for variable displays that do not result in a rescue time reduction, but is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time reduction, used only for variable displays that result in a rescue time reduction (miss). In this example, when the variable pattern is determined to be the variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing), a time reduction entry performance (see, for example, FIG. 16-38 (G) and (H)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction state (i.e., rescue time reduction) will be controlled, as described later. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time reduction state has been reached and that the time reduction state will be controlled, and it is possible to increase the interest when the time reduction state is reached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (J), in this example, when the display is a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction and does not result in a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined to be PA3-2 (seeming jackpot). In other words, the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is not used for variable displays that do not result in a rescue time reduction, but is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time reduction that is used only for variable displays (jackpots) that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is determined, as described below, a display that is the same as the time reduction entry display (see, for example, FIG. 16-38 (G) and (H)) that notifies the player that the time reduction state (i.e. rescue time reduction) will be controlled (see, for example, FIG. 16-41 (H')) is executed, and then a display that notifies the player that a jackpot will be entered (see, for example, FIG. 16-41 (H')) is executed. With this configuration, once the player realizes that the rescue time has been shortened, they are informed that they will hit a jackpot, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases their interest.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 16-7 and 16-8 is just one example, and various modes are possible. For example, if the time-saving state is lost during the time-saving state and the state is controlled to be in the time-saving state again, the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for losses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in Figure 16-7 (C).

Also, for example, only when the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot in the case of a time-saving miss (in this example, when time-saving miss A occurs during the time-saving state), the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as fluctuation pattern table C for misses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in FIG. 16-7 (C).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 16-7 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 16-8 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing number such as 100 or 200.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state are configured to use different fluctuation pattern tables (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in each case (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same), or the average fluctuation time may be longer for the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state via a jackpot or a miss time-saving state.

(Performance control command)
16-9 and 16-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 16-9 and FIG. 16-10, the command 80XX(H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX(H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a miss (no time reduction).

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (time-saving miss A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss A. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (time-saving miss B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss C. Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (time-saving miss C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss C.

Command 9004 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a guaranteed jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden guaranteed jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a sudden guaranteed jackpot.

Command 95XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value according to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, command 957E (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Note that in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and command 957F (H) is uniformly sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 96XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value corresponding to the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the number of remaining changes is 800, command 9608 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery) that designates the number of remaining fluctuations (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored. In this example, when power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is between 701 and 800, command 9708 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction can be transmitted in units of one time up to 126 times, and when the remaining number is 127 times or more, it is transmitted in units of 100 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, two commands may be transmitted in combination so that it is possible to transmit in units of one time even when the remaining number is 127 times or more.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state. Command E004 (H) is a presentation control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of the right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of the right hit notification.

Command F000 (H) is a presentation control command (a customer waiting demo designation command) that designates the start of displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is sent, for example, when no reserved memory is stored (i.e., when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern determination period and at the end of the big win game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also sent, for example, when the power is turned on (when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode in which a setting change process is executed or a setting confirmation mode in which a setting confirmation process is executed, a setting value designation command is sent after the end of each mode, and then a customer waiting demo designation command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer waiting demo designation command is sent when none of the big win game, small win game, and special game are executed and no reserved memory is stored. As described below, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning, it starts displaying a telop indicating that the rescue time-saving function is installed (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). In addition, if 3 minutes pass without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, it starts playing a demonstration movie.

The command F1XX (H) is a performance control command (setting value specification command) that specifies the currently set setting value. Note that the value equivalent to the setting value is set in "XX".

When the presentation control CPU 120 (specifically, the presentation control CPU 120) mounted on the presentation control board 12 receives the above-mentioned presentation control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 16-9 and 16-10, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that presentation control commands other than those shown in Figures 16-9 and 16-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. For example, more detailed presentation control commands related to jackpot games and presentation control commands indicating the game status (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
16-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, steps S8 to S9, and steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when a presentation control command instructing recovery from power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets a value according to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter, and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9701 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Also, for example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9708 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery process is executed, the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery is transmitted, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the current rescue time reduction is notified. In addition, a time saving rescue can be achieved by executing a variable display based on the reserved memory restored by the recovery process (i.e., the reserved memory stored before the power outage). This configuration can reduce the disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a variable display that will result in a time saving rescue was stored before the power outage.

In this example, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten the time for recovery is sent separately from the command at the time of recovery when the power is restored after a power outage, but this is not limited to this form. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command for specifying power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. The rescue time-saving counter may not be initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time-saving flags A to C indicating the time-saving state, the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, and the reserved memory may be initialized, while the value of the rescue time-saving counter may be restored. In this way, the game can be started from the state where the value of the rescue time-saving counter of the previous day continues, so that the investment amount until the rescue time-saving is reached can be reduced and a configuration can be made that does not disadvantage the player. In addition, the rescue time-saving counter can be prevented from being intentionally initialized, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 16-12 and FIG. 16-13 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 100IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characteristic part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 16-2 and 16-3) with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of jackpot determination. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating a probability variable state is not set (if the state is a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value (see Figures 16-2 (A) and 16-3 (A)). Furthermore, if the probability flag is set (high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value (see FIG. 16-2(B) and FIG. 16-3(B)). If the value of the random number for jackpot determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 16-2 and FIG. 16-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred (step 100IWS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, guaranteed jackpot, or sudden guaranteed jackpot) that corresponds to the value that matches the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to hit the jackpot (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 100IWS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable ends (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "800" (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by 1 extra, so in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, the value of the time-saving counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is 1 more than the previous value, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 100IWS71). In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS75). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 100IWS77). Note that whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation, countdown presentation, and effect presentation described below.

In addition, for example, as described below, when a rescue time reduction occurs, the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800"), and in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only when a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent when a rescue time reduction occurs the second time or later.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the state is a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS79). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS79, if the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, it is determined that the state is a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the process of determining whether the time-saving has been missed in step 100IWS81 and thereafter.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the time-saving state is not uniformly determined to be a miss, not only during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but also during the time-saving state via a jackpot and during the time-saving state via a miss. In other words, not only when time-saving flag C is set, but also when time-saving flag A or time-saving flag B is set, the process of determining whether the time-saving state has not been reached after step 100IWS81 may not be performed, and it may be decided that the state is a miss without time-saving.

Conversely, even during a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the processing from step 100IWS81 onwards may be executed to determine whether or not the time-saving state has been exceeded. Also, it may be configured so that both rescue time-saving and time-saving deviations may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to rescue time-saving, or it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to deviations from time-saving.

If the time-saving flag C is not set (i.e., the game is not in a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the game proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS80, if the game is in a high probability state, it is decided that the game will be a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the process of determining whether the time-saving has been missed in step 100IWS81 and thereafter.

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability of winning is not in a probability of winning state), the CPU 103 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is to be determined, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is to be determined (step 100IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is to be determined with a probability of approximately 1/400 (see FIG. 16-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is to be determined with a probability of approximately 1/200 (see FIG. 16-3).

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to occur (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 decides on the type of time-saving miss (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and decides on the type of time-saving. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time-saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number that is the same as the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, if it is configured to determine small wins as well as small win types, it is sufficient to configure it so that the determination process is performed using a common type determination random number not only for the jackpot type determination and the time-saving type determination, but also for the small win type determination.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a sudden probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "4", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "6", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 16-14 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., the variable display is a rescue time reduction and a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the variable pattern table J for rescue time reduction variable jackpot shown in FIG. 16-8 (J) as a table for determining the variable pattern (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 16-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., if the display shows a change that results in a rescue time reduction and it is a miss), the CPU 103 selects the change pattern table I for the rescue time reduction change miss shown in FIG. 16-8 (I) as a table for determining the change pattern (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (i.e., if the number of changes remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 3 or less. In addition, the embodiment is not limited to the one shown in this example, and may be configured to check, for example, whether the value of the first pending memory count counter or the second pending memory count counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table F for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 16-8 (F) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table G for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 16-8 (G) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for a miss during a high probability state shown in FIG. 16-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there are no reserved memories), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss during a normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 16-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 16-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 16-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the miss fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) for the normal state.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 16-7 and FIG. 16-8 will be used based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. After the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern to which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among multiple fluctuation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special pattern variation processing)
16-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls the transmission of any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a jackpot, the decision result of the jackpot type, and the decision result of the time-saving type, if they have not been transmitted yet (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed (step 100IWS1124). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 100IW10 to start lighting up (step 100IWS1125). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 100IWS1125 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1128). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it has not been decided that the time-saving feature should not be activated (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 100IW10 to start turning on (step 100IWS1133). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

When the processing of step 100IWS1133 is executed, in this example, if the rescue time is shortened, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to the pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
16-16 and 16-17 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C, the probability change count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the probability change state, and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 100IW10 to start lighting up (step 100IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time-saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as described later, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the state is controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times (see steps 100IWS172, S173). In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS143, S144, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the rescue time-saving count counter is set to "800" after 800 variable displays are executed without a big hit or a time-saving miss. Then, if the next big hit or time-saving miss does not occur even after 800 variable displays are executed, the second rescue time-saving state is triggered and the state is controlled to a time-saving state. Note that in this example, a time-saving miss does not occur in the time-saving state triggered by the rescue time-saving, but a time-saving miss may occur and when it does occur, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter may be reset (i.e., set to "800").

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that have been set (any of the time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time-saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the special chance count counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the special chance count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the special chance count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the special chance count counter (step 100IWS147) and checks whether the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). If the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the special chance flag and the time-saving flag A, and ends the special chance state (step 100IWS149). The process then proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Then, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 100IW10 to stop lighting (step 100IWS150). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In this example, the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the end of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation.

In addition, in this example, the case where the special probability state ends and the time-saving state also ends at the final special probability state change is shown, but this is not limited to the case, and it may be configured so that only the special probability state ends and the time-saving state continues.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 100IWS153). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving effect counter to "100" (step 100IWS156) if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 100IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss A is not met, but if the time-saving miss B is met (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time-saving counter to 0 (step 100IWS161) if time-saving has been lost (Y in step 100IWS160). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, if the time-saving flag A is set, the CPU 103 resets it (step 100IWS165). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag B and controls the game to the time-saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the time-saving miss occurs, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles are performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state is entered and the game is controlled to the time-saving state.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, when the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168 is executed and a time-saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, the game is controlled to the time-saving state at the end of the pattern determination period, and a time-saving state B designation command is sent to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state via the time-saving loss.

If it has not been decided that the time-saving feature should be removed (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving feature determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the rescue time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving feature flag C and controls the game to the time-saving feature state (step 100IWS173). The CPU 103 also controls the game to send a time-saving feature state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In this example, the system is configured so that the time-saving state is controlled at the timing when the rescue time-saving occurs and the rescue time-saving count counter is set (set to "800"), allowing rescue time-saving to occur continuously, and once the rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state continues until a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible configuration. For example, the system may be configured so that when the rescue time-saving occurs, the system is simply controlled to the time-saving state without setting the rescue time-saving count counter, and then, when the 800 fluctuation display ends and the system is controlled to the normal state, the rescue time-saving count counter is set (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0", but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "0", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be added by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "800".

In addition, in this example, the pattern determination period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, when the rescue time reduction is activated, to ensure a period for effects such as mode transition effects, but during the pattern determination period, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by special effects or the like.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving times counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than "800."

In addition, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving times. For example, the time-saving counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time-saving is performed the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time-saving is performed the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving times counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, or 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 16-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 16-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a time-saving state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time-saving state is lost. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period of a variable display that has become a rescue time-saving state. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time-saving state is entered at the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state may also be entered when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, the time-saving state may also be entered when a rescue time-saving state occurs, so when a missing pattern for a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving state is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period.

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the pattern determination period but also during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has been rescued. If configured in this way, it will be possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving function even during the time-saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 16-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and controls to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that is ending this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Note that whether it is a normal jackpot or not can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state A designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (i.e., if it is a chance jackpot or sudden chance jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the chance jackpot flag and controls the state to chance jackpot (step 100IWS541). The CPU 103 also sets the chance jackpot count counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a chance jackpot state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 108IW will be described. FIG. 16-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 108IW. As shown in FIG. 16-20, in the normal state, if a sure-variant jackpot or a sudden sure-variant jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a sure-variant state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and in the normal state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, even if a miss occurs in the normal state, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to a time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state is reached (after the RAM clear process, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, if the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the game will be controlled to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-20, if a special jackpot or sudden special jackpot occurs during the special jackpot state, the player is controlled back to the special jackpot state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the player is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the special jackpot state, the time-saving miss pattern is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no rescue time-saving state. Also, in the special jackpot state, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the player is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146-S149).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-20, in the time-saving state A, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) again (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is a miss, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state A becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-20, in the time-saving state B, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a win) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, even if there is a miss in the time-saving state B, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if the variable display has ended 30, 50, 100, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, if the time-saving state A is missed during the time-saving state and the game is controlled to time-saving state B, time-saving state B will continue until the next big win occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state B becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-20, in the time-saving state C, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal jackpot, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the time-saving state C, there is no case where a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Also, in the time-saving state C, if 800 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see steps 100IWS170-S173).

In this example, when a time-saving symbol that does not match the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed during time-saving state A, the state is uniformly switched to time-saving state B, but the control is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times corresponding to the determined time-saving type, and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the current time-saving state A may be continued as is.

In this example, if a normal jackpot occurs during time-saving state B, the game will automatically transition to time-saving state A; however, this control is not limited to this. For example, the game may be configured to compare the current remaining number of time-saving times with the number of time-saving times corresponding to a normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game will continue in the current time-saving state B.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the time-saving miss symbol is not derived and displayed during time-saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but this is not the only possible configuration, and for example, it may be configured so that it is possible to determine that the time-saving miss is occurring even during time-saving state C.

In addition, in this example, when the probability variable state is entered, the probability variable state is ended based on the execution of 100 variable display cycles, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the probability variable state may be ended by a lottery process for each variable display, and the probability variable state may be ended based on the decision to end the probability variable state.

(Performance control main processing)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Fig. 16-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the performance control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In Fig. 16-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those shown in Fig. 6.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 executes a variable display of small symbols that are reduced versions of the left, center, and right decorative symbols, in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbols, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth pattern process (step 100IWS702). In this example, the fourth pattern process in step 100IWS702 is executed, and the fourth pattern is displayed in synchronization with the first and second special patterns, separately from the decorative pattern. In this example, when the first special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided to the left of the image display 5. When the second special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided to the right of the image display 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as that of step S77 shown in FIG. 6.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by alternately turning on and off two LEDs arranged above and below in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a, 21b.

In addition, when the variable time ends, the stopped pattern of the fourth pattern is displayed as a confirmed pattern at the start of the pattern confirmation period. In this case, if there is a jackpot, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a jackpot pattern with red lights. In addition, if there is a time-saving miss, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a time-saving miss pattern with blue lights. In addition, if there is a miss (no time-saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a miss pattern (no time-saving) with black lights.

The form of the stopping pattern of the fourth symbol is not limited to the form shown in this example, and may be configured to derive and display the stopping pattern of the fourth symbol in a form that allows distinction of the type of jackpot or time-saving type, for example.

In addition, in this example, a dedicated symbol is provided as the fourth symbol when the time-saving feature is lost, but this is not limited to the above, and the fourth symbol may be a common stopping symbol when the jackpot is hit and when the time-saving feature is lost.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 16-22 to 16-23 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading out the command, the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 100IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 100IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination B designation command is received, the second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second pattern confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 100IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 100IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 (step 100IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received command to specify the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 in a command storage area for specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS626).

If the received performance control command is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command in a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery (step 100IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display an initial result according to the number of times until the time for rescue based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 100 or less), the initial result is displayed as "112", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 100 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 101 or more and 200 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial result is displayed as "889," indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition, this is not limited to the case where an initial result indicating the number of remaining changes is displayed when the power is restored. For example, in the first change display after the power is restored, a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 changes after the power is restored, a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes may be displayed so that a suggestive display is displayed at a relatively early stage after the power is restored. Also, it may be configured so that the initial result does not indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the initial result may not indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 100IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 100IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 100IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 100IWS636).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state C (step 100IWS637), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time-saving state is the same, different background images are displayed depending on whether the time-saving state is a jackpot state, a time-saving state is a miss state, or a time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state. With this configuration, the difference in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, and interest can be increased.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and a common background image may be displayed regardless of whether the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a rescue time-saving state. For example, a common background image may be displayed in steps 100IW634, 100IWS636, and 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state is a miss, and the time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state.

If the received performance control command is a command to specify a special probability state (step 100IWS639), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image that corresponds to the special probability state (for example, a red background image that corresponds to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received performance control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 100IWS641), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to start lighting up (step 100IWS642). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134), so the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 100IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to end its illumination (step 100IWS644).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 100IWS645). For example, if a command designating a large prize winning slot is received, the large prize winning slot flag is set to indicate that a prize has been won in the large prize slot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
16-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. As described above, in this example, when the reserved memory is not stored (i.e., the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the symbol determination period and the end of the big win game, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demo designation command to the performance control board 12.

When a customer waiting demo designation command is received, if 10 seconds have passed since the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning (Y in step 105IWS250), the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption display execution lottery process (step 105IWS251).

In this example, during periods when no variable display is being performed, it is possible to display a caption indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function. In step 105IWS251, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to display a caption.

Figure 16-25 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. Of Figure 16-25, Figure 16-25 (A) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 16-25 (B) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6".

As shown in Figures 16-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the rate at which captions are displayed while waiting for customers varies depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be indicated by the presence or absence of captions displayed while waiting for customers.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 16-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the setting value is configured to change the rate at which captions are displayed while customers are waiting. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is favorable based on whether or not captions are displayed while customers are waiting.

Note that in FIG. 16-25, examples of setting value 1 and setting value 6 are shown for the sake of simplicity, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a table corresponding to multiple setting values (e.g., setting values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to display the telop (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a lottery process to determine the telop display mode (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to display the telop in a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105IWS253, the presentation mode for displaying the telop is determined by lottery.

Figure 16-25 (C) is a lottery table for determining the telop mode used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 16-25 (D) is a lottery table for determining the telop mode used when the setting value is set to "6".

As shown in Fig. 16-25(C) and (D), in this example, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers can indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 16-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the presentation style of the telop display displayed while customers are waiting varies depending on the setting value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is set to an advantageous value depending on the presentation style of the telop display while customers are waiting.

Then, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the initial winning (Y in step 105IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 will play a demonstration movie (step 105IWS256).

Note that the display of subtitles while customers are waiting and the playback of demonstration movies will end when a performance control command is received at the time of the start of the winning.

Figure 16-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode for displaying subtitles. In the example shown in Figure 16-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) or (A) (D) (E).

As shown in FIG. 16-26 (A), if the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, a customer waiting demo designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Then, after the performance control board 12 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of the initial winning, and it is decided to display a caption while waiting for customers, a caption is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function.

At this time, if it is decided to display the caption display in blue presentation mode, caption display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 16-26 (B) the border is white). Also, if it is decided to display the caption display in red presentation mode, caption display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 16-26 (D) the border is filled in black).

Then, when three minutes have passed since the performance control board 12 received the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as the performance control command at the time of the initial winning, the image display device 5 starts playing a demonstration movie. Note that, as shown in Figures 16-26 (C) and (E), the subtitle display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Preview notice setting process)
FIG. 16-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the performance control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101) in the special symbol process, the occurrence of a start winning is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process is executed to predict the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. Then, after the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the pre-reading judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

In the pre-reading preview setting process (step S161), for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-reading preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-27, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether it has received a presentation control command at the time of the start winning (for example, a presentation control command for specifying the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead judgment) (step 108 IWS 701).

When a presentation control command for a start winning has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the number of reserved memories, including the reserved memory for which a presentation control command for a start winning has been newly received, is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction (step 108IWS702). In other words, it judges whether the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun. Then, if the number of reserved memories is not greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun, the advance notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 108IWS702, it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction among the variable displays corresponding to the pending memory stored before the rescue time reduction, while restricting the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display after the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of a look-ahead preview performance across the rescue time reduction where the game status changes. This configuration makes it possible to avoid complication of the control processing and also to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

If the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, i.e., if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed before the rescue time reduction, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, the type and mode of performance (step 108 IWS 703).

Figure 16-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS703, the tables shown in Figure 16-28 are used to decide whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, what type and mode of performance to use.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the system uses the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 16-28 (A) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, and when the gaming state is time-saving state C, the system uses the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 16-28 (B) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance.

As shown in Figures 16-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the look-ahead preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the look-ahead preview performance is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this configuration, as shown in Fig. 16-28 (A) and (B), the time-saving state C is configured to have a lower rate of executing the pre-reading preview performance when the display result is a miss than in game states other than the time-saving state C. With this configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (i.e., when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 16-28(C), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 16-28(D). Specifically, the type of performance is decided to be either a chance eye performance or a hold change performance.

The chance eye effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect will be a jackpot by displaying a chance eye (in this example, "778") as the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed that teases whether or not the display result will be a chance eye (in this example, "778"). Also, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed in a red performance mode, a red chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display, and when the chance eye effect is executed in a blue performance mode, a blue chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display.

The hold change effect is an effect in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, suggesting that the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect will be a jackpot. Also, for example, if the hold change effect is executed in a red presentation mode, a red hold display is displayed, and if the hold change effect is executed in a blue presentation mode, a blue hold display is displayed.

Figure 16-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of preview effect. Among Figures 16-29, Figures 16-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of chance eye effects, and Figures 16-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of reserve change effects.

When the chance eye effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, after the one variable display is started as shown in FIG. 16-29 (A1), the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as stopped as shown in FIG. 16-29 (B1) and (C1). Then, as shown in FIG. 16-29 (D1), an effect is executed to suggest whether the central decorative symbol will stop as a "7" that becomes the chance eye "778" or a "6" that does not become the chance eye "778". After that, as shown in FIG. 16-29 (E1), when the central decorative symbol stops as a "7" and the chance eye "778" is displayed, it is suggested that there may be a reserved memory in the reserved memory that corresponds to the variable display that becomes a jackpot. Note that after the encouraging effect is executed, a symbol other than the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be displayed as stopped.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 16-29 (A2) and (B2), when a start winning occurs, a new hold display is displayed in a display mode (e.g., red) different from the normal mode, suggesting the possibility that a variable display resulting in a jackpot will be executed based on the hold memory corresponding to that hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is carried over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 16-29, and may be such that a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and then changes to a display mode different from the normal mode at any timing before the corresponding hold display and active display end.

Figure 16-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue. Of Figure 16-30, Figure 16-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot, and Figure 16-30(B) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a rescue. In the examples shown in Figures 16-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that the start winning occurs at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 16-30(A), when a chance eye effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, an effect is executed to tease whether or not the chance eye pattern will stop in the variable display executed from the time the start winning occurs until the variable display of the look-ahead target starts, and then the chance eye pattern is displayed stationary. Because such teasing effects are included, when executing a chance eye effect, it is necessary to ensure a predetermined execution period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-30 (A), when a hold change performance is executed as a look-ahead preview performance, the display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at the timing when the start winning occurs, or at any timing across multiple change displays from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. The display of the hold display and active display in the changed display mode is then continued until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. In other words, when a hold change performance is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends, and can further continue until the change display of the look-ahead target ends.

In this way, even in the pre-reading preview performance, the chance eye performance and the hold change performance have different execution periods. In other words, the chance eye performance is executed for a specified period (e.g., 2 seconds) during one variable display, whereas the hold change performance is executed over multiple variable displays.

As mentioned above, in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed when the player misses, and the shortened variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time-saving state via the rescue, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed when the player misses. Therefore, as shown in Figure 16-30, in the time-saving state via the rescue, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect.

In this example, as shown in Figures 16-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via a jackpot, both the chance eye effect and the reserve change effect can be executed as the look-ahead preview effect, while in the time-saving state via a rescue, the chance eye effect is restricted from being executed as the look-ahead preview effect, and only the reserve change effect can be executed. With this configuration, the look-ahead preview effect can be executed appropriately according to the game state.

In addition, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the performance mode of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance mode decision table shown in FIG. 16-28(E), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the performance type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 16-28(D). Specifically, it is decided to be either a red performance mode or a blue performance mode.

As shown in Figures 16-28 (E) and (F), in this example, the look-ahead preview performance can be executed using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and is configured so that the probability of executing the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, as shown in Fig. 16-28 (E) and (F), when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode. With this configuration, when in time-saving state C (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the blue performance mode, which has a low jackpot expectation. In this example, when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode, but when there is a miss, there is a 99% chance that the pre-reading preview performance is not executed. Therefore, it is configured to prevent frequent cases where the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the red performance mode but the display result is a miss.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 16-28, the execution ratio of the pre-reading preview performance, the ratio of performance types and performance modes can be made different between when the time-saving state C is in effect (i.e. when no jackpots have occurred for a long period of time) and when the time-saving state C is not in effect, thereby increasing interest.

In this example, as described below, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (only preview performances with high expectations may not be executed), but the execution of the look-ahead preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance of a type with high expectations may be reduced (or not executed).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 16-28, for example, even in time-saving state C, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving miss, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance may not be restricted.

When the processing of step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, if it is determined that a chance eye performance is to be executed, in step 108IWS704, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting for the chance eye performance. Then, in steps 108IWS809-S810 of the variable display start setting process described below, if the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye performance is executed by selecting a process table that includes the chance eye performance. The chance eye flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display that is the subject of the pre-reading is executed.

Also, for example, if it is decided to execute a hold change presentation, in step 108 IWS704, the hold change presentation is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 16-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out a variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (probable jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (sudden probable jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols with two matching symbols on the left and right is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving effect. Also, if a setting is made to execute a chance eye effect, a combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (in this example, "778") is determined.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 16-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS802A, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 16-32 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 times or less, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 16-32 (B) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. Also, when it is decided to execute the preview performance, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 16-32 (C) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 16-32 (D) is used to decide the performance mode.

As shown in Figures 16-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 16-32(A) and (B), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview effect is executed is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). This configuration makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed but does not result in a jackpot during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less and the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed).

In addition, during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed, but by restricting the execution of the timer effect as a preview effect at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, and to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in Figures 16-32 (C) and (D), in this example, a preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and the system is configured so that the probability of executing a preview effect in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of a preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-32(C) and (D), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed in red presentation mode when the display result is a miss is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in red presentation mode during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, if the device is configured to be able to execute multiple types of preview effects with different jackpot expectations, execution may be restricted only for preview effects of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, if jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, preview effects of a type with a jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher) during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer times remaining until the rescue time reduction).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 16-32, for example, even if the number of remaining plays until the rescue time-saving feature is 10 or less, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview performance may not be restricted.

As mentioned above, in this example, in the case of time-saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted, but the execution of the preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the preview performance type with high expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 (step 100IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 800), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state, thereby increasing the player's interest when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common aspect to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period is reached is 0, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached, a special time-saving feature change pattern for a jackpot is used to create a time-saving effect, but this is not the only option. For example, a full rotation effect (in other words, a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned can be executed, which is not executed unless the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving time is reached, a dedicated pattern for the miss of the time-saving time is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern for a miss similar to that of normal time-saving time may be used, or a pattern for specifying a reach performance with a short time may be used. By configuring in this way, the pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving time is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the time-saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 is switched to a background image (in this example, an orange background image) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via the time-saving time-saving) (see step 078IWS638), so that the change in the background image can notify that the time-saving state is being controlled by the time-saving time-saving state.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less (step 108IWS807). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 108IWS808). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until a rescue change occurs is 10 or less, a countdown effect and an effect are executed. This configuration makes it possible to make the player look forward to a rescue change, increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by quitting the game just before a rescue change occurs.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but it may be determined by lottery whether they are executed or not. Also, for example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is not 10 or less, it may be determined by lottery whether a so-called fake countdown effect and effect effect (for example, executed in a manner common to the countdown effect and the effect effect, but is interrupted midway without continuing until the count number "0" is reached. See FIG. 16-42) is executed or not. In this case, it may be configured so that the rate at which the countdown effect and the effect effect (including real and fake) are executed is higher when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less than when it is not 10 or less. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a rescue change and increase the interest. It is also possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player caused by the player ending the game just before the rescue change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 108IWS807), the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed (step 108IWS809), and if the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance eye presentation (including a presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated) (step 108IWS810). Note that if the chance eye presentation has not been set to be executed, it may be possible to determine by lottery whether or not to execute a presentation in which the chance eye pattern is not displayed after the presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated (a so-called false chance eye presentation).

If the chance eye effect is not set to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display performance processing)
16-33 and 16-34 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 100IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 100IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 100IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first pattern confirmation B designation command nor the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation C command reception flag or the second confirmation C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 100IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to the determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS861). Then proceed to step 100IWS862.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process proceeds to step 100IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, normally, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 100IWS857 will be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 100IWS858 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting for special drawing)
FIG. 16-35 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for a special drawing hit (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the waiting process for a special drawing hit, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the determined performance period timer (step 100IWS871), and checks whether the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS873), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 100IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern (step 100IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern, the processing ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not being displayed as a finalized pattern, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stopping pattern (missing pattern (no time reduction), time reduction missing pattern, jackpot pattern) (step 100IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is displayed as stopped in step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 100IWS883). Whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table according to the mode transition performance (performance that notifies the player of a transition to a probability change state (probability change mode) or a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the performance during the jackpot, including a right-hit notification (step 100IWS885). Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS887).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (i.e., if a losing symbol (no time reduction) or a time-reduction losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 100IWS889).

(Performance execution timing)
Next, the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed will be described. FIG. 16-36 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed. As shown in FIG. 16-36, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is ended, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75), the time reduction entry effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the losing symbol (without time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing symbol (without time reduction) is displayed as a confirmed one for a symbol determination period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 16-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 16-36, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period has elapsed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 16-36, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (a time reduction state via a rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, a period of time can be secured for notifying the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) will begin in the normal state, thereby clarifying the presentation when switching game states and increasing interest.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 16-37 to 16-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 16-37 to 16-40, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 16-37(A), the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 800 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "800 spins left until rescue time reduction begins!". Also, at this time, an explanation of the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103. With this configuration, the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine equipped with the rescue time reduction can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-37(B), for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 16-37(A), the remaining spins display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, saying "700 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!" Also, at this time, an explanation of the rescue time-saving mode (for example, an explanation of the rescue time-saving function and the effects of the rescue time-saving mode) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 16-37 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 800, but to be performed when the number of remaining changes is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number of changes is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Figures 16-37 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 16-37(C) to 16-38(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a countdown display 100IW104A is displayed in the center of the screen according to the number of remaining spins. For example, the countdown display 100IW104A shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop. Each figure shows an example of a losing pattern (in this example, a combination of the patterns "653", "844", and "123") being derived and displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 16-37(C) to 16-38(E), when there are 10 or more spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range that corresponds to the number of remaining spins. In this example, as the number of remaining spins decreases (i.e., as the rescue time-saving mode approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-38 (E), when there is one spin left until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-38(F), when there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode and the display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 changes (i.e., the display of the changes that will result in the rescue time-saving mode) starts, a time-saving entry effect is started to notify the player that the mode will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), as shown in FIG. 16-38(G), and the time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. This configuration makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the mode will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), and it is possible to increase the player's interest when the mode is controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode).

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-38(G), when the time-saving entry performance starts, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-38(H), when the symbol stops, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol combination "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, when making notifications during the time-saving entry performance, the notifications may be made in the same manner as when making notifications during the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Furthermore, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving.

As shown in FIG. 16-39(I), when the pattern determination period begins, the mode effect start display 100IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from then on, even during the mode transition effect, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-39(J), when the mode transition presentation starts, an operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 16-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 16-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the player that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 100IW108, which instructs the player to hit to the right, is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 16-39 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a presentation (so-called reserved consecutive presentation) in the same manner as in FIG. 16-39 (K) based on the look-ahead judgment result designation command received. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive presentation is executed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short change time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 16-8 (E)). Therefore, the change display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the change display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 16-39 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 16-39 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

The example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 100IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1", but the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 16-38 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-40 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time-saving feature will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time-saving feature has begun" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation begins, the game transitions to time-saving state C, and the rescue time-saving feature begins.

Next, we will explain the presentation style of the time-saving effect. Figure 16-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation style of the time-saving effect. The example shown in Figure 16-41 is carried out following the examples in Figures 16-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in Figure 16-41 (E), when there is one spin left until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and then the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-41 (F'), there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to rescue time-saving mode, and the display of decorative pattern 100IW100 and small pattern 100IW101 begins to change. Note that although this change indicates that rescue time-saving mode has been established, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game will transition to a jackpot game without transitioning to a time-saving mode due to rescue time-saving mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-41(G'), the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, and the time-saving entry appearance display 100IW104C in the same manner as the time-saving entry appearance effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that, as shown in FIG. 16-41(G'), when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just as when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts.

As shown in FIG. 16-41(H), when the display of the time-saving entry performance display 100IW104C ends, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbols stop, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (the symbol combination of "254" in this example) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stops, and the jackpot symbol (the symbol combination of "777" in this example) is derived and displayed. Then, the game moves to the jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of the jackpot after first recognizing that the time-saving rescue has been established, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases interest.

When the configuration of this feature unit 108IW is applied to a gaming machine that is also configured to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a time-saving entry appearance effect may be executed to notify the player that a small win has occurred.

Next, we will explain the performance aspects of so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances. Figure 16-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the performance aspects of so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances.

As shown in Figures 16-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false countdown effect is executed, and a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10 is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 16-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false effect is executed, and the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are terminated before the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where there is one spin remaining. At this time, since the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is not 0, the time-saving entry effect is not executed.

When the so-called fake countdown and effect effects shown in FIG. 16-42 can be configured to be executable, it is also possible to prevent the execution of teasing effects that suggest the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction, as shown in FIG. 16-37 (A) and (B). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is real or fake when it is displayed.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time-saving function is not activated, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure the game so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the pattern determination period in the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the pattern determination period, but the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern determination period may be set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a delay period until the next variation is started is set, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the delay period. Below, a modified example 1 in which a delay period until the next variation is started is set and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed is described.

Figure 16-43 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing in modified example 1. As shown in Figure 16-43, in modified example 1, the special symbol process processing includes a next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in addition to the process shown in Figure 5. Note that in modified example 1, the start winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination process (step 101) shown in Figure 5.

In variant 1, the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0". Also, the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "1". Also, the special pattern variable processing (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". Also, the special pattern stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3".

In addition, the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4".

The pre-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". The during-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". The post-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". The end of the jackpot process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8".

In addition, the small win pre-opening process (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". In addition, the small win opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". In addition, the small win end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "11".

In the first modified example, the normal special symbol processing (step 100IWS110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the normal special symbol processing (step S110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 5. In addition, in the first modified example, the special symbol changing processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step 100IWS113) are different from the special symbol changing processing (step S112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, the same as normal, even if the rescue time reduction occurs, and a first symbol determination C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command is sent.

In addition, in the first modified example, the process before the big win opening (step 100IWS115) to the process after the small win ending (step 100IWS121) is the same as the process before the big win opening (step S114) to the process after the small win ending (step S120) shown in FIG. 5.

Figure 16-44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in the modified example 1. In the modified example 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 16-16 and 16-17. In the modified example 1, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a value equivalent to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example) to a postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement processing (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in Figure 16-17.

Figure 16-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in variant 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the delay period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS194). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in variant example 1, the next change postponement process transitions to the time-saving state when the postponement period until the start of the next change (20 seconds in this example) has elapsed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the next change postponement process may be configured to issue a right-hit notification and transition to the time-saving state at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next change or during the postponement period. In other words, the next change postponement process may be configured to control to the time-saving state and issue a right-hit notification, or it may be configured to only issue a right-hit notification without controlling to the time-saving state, and various other modes are possible.

In addition, in the first modified example, a uniform 20-second postponement period is measured in the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, different postponement periods may be set for rescue time reductions in the normal state and rescue time reductions in the time reduction state. For example, when rescue time reduction occurs during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period may be set and measured in the next change postponement process compared to rescue time reductions in the normal state, and the postponement period may be shortened for the second or subsequent rescue time reductions.

In addition, while the next change postponement process is being executed, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by props or the like.

Moreover, in the first modified example, when a rescue time reduction occurs, the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next change starts. However, this is not limited to such a case, and it may also be applied to the display of a change that is not in the time reduction state, and the same next change postponement process as in the first modified example may be executed to extend the period until the next change starts.

In addition, as described above, when applied to the variable display when the time-saving feature has failed, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 16-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variable postponement processing. If configured in this way, the pattern determination period of the variable display when the time-saving feature has failed can be made the same as the normal variable display at 0.5 seconds, and processing related to right-hit notifications, etc. can be executed in the same process as in the case of rescue time-saving features, etc.

Figure 16-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in modified example 1. As shown in Figure 16-46, in modified example 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern ends, and when a losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed stationary, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time reduction occurs (see steps 100IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the display of the special pattern is finished and the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for the same 0.5 second pattern determination period as usual (see step 078 IWS1135). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern determination period ends, as shown in FIG. 16-46, the next change postponement period of 20 seconds is started (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 16-46, a mode transition performance is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 16-46, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5. Next, when the next change postponement period has passed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 16-46, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (time reduction state via rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5.

When configured as in variant 1, a change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and after the pattern determination period has elapsed, a jackpot 4 signal may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., the start of the next change postponement period). The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next change postponement period after the pattern determination period of the change display that has become the rescue time shortening. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

Furthermore, when configured as in variant example 1, a test signal or external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which it is expected that he or she will perform a right hit may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., the start of the next change postponement period), or a right hit notification may be initiated. With this configuration, a signal regarding a right hit can be output or a right hit notification can be issued at the appropriate time.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, during the time-saving state controlled based on the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 16-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to display the fluctuation of 1.5 seconds at high speed, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Below, modified examples 2 to 4 that differ in the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving will be described. FIG. 16-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples 2 to 4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving, and modified example 8-37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples 2 to 4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving.

First, a method of selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving in the modified example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16-47(A). In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, regardless of whether 800 variation displays are executed after the RAM clear process (without a jackpot or a time-saving miss) or 800 variation displays are executed after a jackpot or a time-saving miss (without the next jackpot or a time-saving miss), the variation pattern tables F and G (see FIG. 16-8(F) and (G)) are selected uniformly from 10 variations before the rescue time-saving, and a 5-second or 12-second variation display is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and the effect effect, and after the rescue time-saving is entered and the time-saving state is controlled, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 16-8(E)) is selected uniformly to execute a 1.5-second high-speed variation display, but this is not limited to such an embodiment.

For example, as shown in variant example 2 of FIG. 16-47, in the case where 800 fluctuation displays are performed after the RAM clear process and a rescue time reduction is achieved, even if it is between 10 fluctuations and 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 16-7(B)) is selected to perform the same fluctuation display as normal, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 16-7(C)) is selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached, and a 5-second fluctuation display may be performed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in modified example 3 of FIG. 16-47, in the case where 800 variable displays are performed after a jackpot is hit and a rescue time-saving period is reached, a variable pattern for rescue time-saving period misses (for example, variable pattern PA3-1) is selected from variable pattern table I (see FIG. 16-8 (I)) when the 800th variable display is performed, and a variable display with a variable time of 25 seconds is performed. Note that, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the time-saving period entry effect is performed during the variable display, and the mode transition effect and right-hit notification are performed during the pattern determination period, but it may be configured to perform, for example, a mode transition effect and right-hit notification during the 25-second variable display (therefore, in this case, the pattern determination period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in variants 2 and 3 of FIG. 16-47, the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display that results in rescue time reduction between when rescue time reduction occurs after RAM clear processing and when rescue time reduction occurs after a jackpot, and the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display after transitioning to a time reduction state via rescue time reduction.

Also, for example, as shown in variant example 4 of FIG. 16-47, it may be configured to select fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 16-7(B)) to display fluctuations in the same way as normal even when it is 10 fluctuations or 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 16-7(C)) during the time reduction state based on the first rescue time reduction to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached and display fluctuations of 5 seconds at a high rate, and select fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 16-8(E)) during the time reduction state based on the second rescue time reduction to display fluctuations of 1.5 seconds at high speed.

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 2 in the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 16-48 to 16-54. Note that, regarding Example 2, the differences from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs or the approaching rescue time reduction are not indicated. Therefore, in Example 2, a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the rescue time reduction, such as fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 16-8 (F) in Example 1 or fluctuation pattern table G shown in FIG. 16-8 (G) is not provided. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 16-8 (F) and (G) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern only immediately before the rescue time reduction, there is a possibility that the player will realize that the rescue time reduction is about to occur due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern, but by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing.

In addition, in Example 2, a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that is also used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction is used for the variation display that results in rescue time reduction, rather than a dedicated variation pattern for rescue time reduction. Therefore, in Example 2, a variation pattern table for variations when rescue time reduction occurs, such as variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 16-8 (I) in Example 1 or variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 16-8 (J) is not provided. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the variation pattern when rescue time reduction occurs and before rescue time reduction occurs, and the data volume can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 16-48 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 16-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if it is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for misses during a high probability state shown in FIG. 16-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses during a normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 16-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 16-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 16-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the miss fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) for the normal state.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 16-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 16-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 16-7 and 16-8 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special pattern determination buffer (step 100IWS1716).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demo performance control process in embodiment 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated in principle. Therefore, although a telop indicating that the rescue time reduction function is provided is displayed based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 16-26), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated by the presence or absence of this telop display or the performance mode. In other words, in the second embodiment, a telop explaining the rescue time reduction is always displayed in a common mode based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command.

In the second embodiment, it may also be possible to indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching, depending on whether or not a caption display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction occurs (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of the caption display (e.g., to execute it less frequently or not at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring it in this way, the background image changes suddenly when the rescue time reduction occurs (i.e., a notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin), providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 16-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 16-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution decision table and the preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. In step 108IWS802A of Example 2, regardless of the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 16-50 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. In addition, if it is decided to execute the preview performance, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 16-50 (B) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance.

In Example 2, as shown in Figs. 16-50 (A) and (B), regardless of the number of remaining plays until the rescue time reduction, whether or not to execute a preview effect and the presentation style when executed are determined by a common ratio. Also, in Example 2, similar to Example 1, when the rescue time reduction is reached and the game moves to time reduction state C, the image display device 5 is configured to switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time reduction state C (time reduction state via rescue time reduction) (see step 078IWS638). With this configuration, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time reduction control by rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or whether the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated in principle, so the processing for executing teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs, and the processing for displaying the initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction is reached are omitted.

In the second embodiment, too, it may be possible to execute teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is activated. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction is activated (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects (e.g., execution rate is reduced, or they are not executed at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring in this way, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin) is executed suddenly, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the variable display that results in rescue time reduction does not use a special variable pattern for rescue time reduction, but rather uses a variable pattern that is also used for variable displays that do not result in rescue time reduction (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variable)). Therefore, in Example 2, processing for executing a time reduction entry effect or a time reduction appearance effect is omitted. With this configuration, for example, after the variable display of variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variable) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time reduction control by rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Performance execution timing in Example 2)
Next, a description will be given of the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2. FIG. 16-51 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2.

As shown in FIG. 16-51, the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1) ends when the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts and the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a 0.5 second pattern determination period (see step 100IWS1137). Next, the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75) in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and results in the rescue time reduction also ends when the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed after the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts, as in the immediately preceding variable display, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a 0.5 second pattern determination period (see step 100IWS1137). Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the game moves to time-saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 16-51, the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS638). This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and prevent the presentation from becoming complicated. It can also clearly notify the player of the change in game state, which can increase the player's interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-51, during the period in which the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times) after transitioning to time-saving state C, a right-hit notification is executed (see FIG. 16-52 (C1)). This configuration makes it possible to make the player aware that the game state is one in which right-hits are to be performed while preventing the presentation related to the transition to time-saving state C from becoming complicated, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

(Example of performance in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving in the second embodiment, will be described. Fig. 16-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Fig. 16-52, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 16-52(A), when the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction starts and the special pattern variable time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 16-52(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the missing patterns.

Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display begins, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (C1), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed.

In addition, if the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (C2), based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, the image display device 5 may switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification may be executed.

In addition, at the timings shown in Figs. 16-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be given using the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 16-37 (A) and (B). In addition, no effects are given indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is near, but the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 16-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed at any timing. Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 16-52, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time-saving control through rescue time-saving will begin) is executed suddenly, providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

In addition, changes in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing the interest when a rescue time-saving feature is established. In addition, the fluctuation patterns can be standardized before and after a rescue time-saving feature is established, reducing data volume.

The presentation mode until transition to time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving mode in Example 2, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 16-52. For example, it may be something like modified example 1 shown in FIG. 16-53 or modified example 2 shown in FIG. 16-53.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 1])
FIG. 16-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of embodiment 2.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 16-53, as shown in FIG. 16-53(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 16-53(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is executed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before.

Then, when the special pattern change time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, the blackout state is cleared and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the missing patterns, as shown in FIG. 16-53 (C).

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 16-53 (D), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed. Note that at the timing of FIG. 16-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image may be displayed or a sound effect may be output to notify that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) is about to begin.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 16-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 2])
Figure 16-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of embodiment 2.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 16-54, as shown in FIG. 16-54(A), the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 8 seconds) of the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 16-54(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed temporarily stopped in a combination of losing patterns on the image display device 5. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 16-54(B), the special pattern variable time has not elapsed, so the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed variable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16-54(C), the image display device 5 executes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) that was displayed immediately before. Also, while the time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is being executed, the special pattern variation time elapses, and the small pattern 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of losing patterns. The time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) continues to be executed during the pattern determination period.

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 16-54(D), the blackout state is cleared on the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to one corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (in this example, a background image with an orange display color). Also, as shown in FIG. 16-54(D), a right-hit notification is executed.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 16-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

In addition, at the timing of Figures 16-53 (C), (D), Figures 16-54 (C), (D), etc., explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be provided using the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figures 16-37 (A) and (B). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the above-described embodiment 1 of the characteristic part 108IW, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach and the determination of the execution of the preview performance are restricted, while in the second embodiment, neither is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) may be determined and a preview performance of a type with a low expectation among the preview performances may be executed. In other words, the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach may be restricted, and the execution of a preview performance of a type with a high expectation among the preview performances may be restricted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, as a performance (also called a rescue suggestion performance) that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or that the rescue time reduction is near, a provocative performance, a countdown performance, an effect performance, or an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction or a caption display while waiting for customers (for example, the caption display 108IW101 shown in FIG. 16-26) is displayed, but is not limited to such a form. For example, at any timing during the fluctuation display or the fluctuation stop, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or the rescue time reduction may be suggested by the execution frequency or execution mode of an action performance that operates the movable body 32, a light emission performance that causes a light-emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), a vibration performance that vibrates the movable body 32, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, if the presentation control command sent when the power is turned on (for example, a presentation control command instructing recovery from a power outage or a presentation control command instructing initialization) cannot be received properly by the presentation control board 12 (for example, if a command is missed or garbled), normal presentation can be executed based on commands specifying the game state or commands specifying the variation pattern, but rescue suggestion presentations that indicate the number of variations remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching may not be executed (note that they may be executed once a jackpot has occurred). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player from getting their hopes up due to erroneous rescue suggestion presentations.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, if the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (sent each time the variable display is executed in this example) that designates the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed only during the variable display when the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is not received properly, or the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed until the next big win occurs. Also, for example, if the command is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may be executed with a presentation mode or execution rate that suggests that there are many fluctuations remaining that will result in the rescue time reduction (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not close). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from getting hopeful due to an erroneous rescue suggestion effect.

In addition, the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In the characteristic portion 108IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the time-saving flag C is set each time a rescue time-saving event occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the time-saving flag (fourth value) set for the second rescue time-saving event after a second transition may be different from the time-saving flag (third value) set for the first rescue time-saving event.

In the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 16-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given just before the end of the time-saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the rescue time-saving state.

Note that, in the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 16-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given just before the end of the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and just before the start of the rescue time-saving function.

As explained above, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A).

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state) and a variable display The state control means is capable of controlling the numerical information to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 16-49) that is capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120) when the variable display is being executed; and a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS170 in the effect control CPU 120) that notifies the user that control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. The game device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a background image changes as shown in FIG. 16-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in FIG. 16-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in FIG. 16-54 (C)) to notify the player of the occurrence of a certain condition (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 100IWS638 as shown in FIG. 16-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 16-44. See FIG. 16-50). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide a sense of surprise to the player, enhancing interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacking out when the variation starts, as shown in FIG. 16-53 (B)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A includes a variable display execution means for effecting, capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (for example, blacking out when the variation ends, as shown in FIG. 16-54 (C)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-52 (C1), a background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanation performance execution means capable of executing an explanation performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, at the timing shown in Fig. 16-52 (C1), (C2), Fig. 16-53 (D), and Fig. 16-54 (D), an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Fig. 16-37 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-48) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state has been controlled due to the fulfillment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to means 6A, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a hold memory means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means even when the power supply is stopped, an initialization means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process to initialize the memory contents of the backup memory means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a recovery means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when power supply is started. With this configuration, control can be optimized through initialization processing, and disadvantages to players can be reduced when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of time-saving flags A to C) that can identify that the device is being controlled in a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are retained by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process, but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B).

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-14). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the part executing step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100); the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (A) and (B), the variable display pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable display pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the case of a jackpot). In the case of either a win or a miss), when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-7(A), the rate of determining the variable display pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the variable display pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is higher in the case of a jackpot than the variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) in the case of a jackpot), and in the case of a specified period before the special condition is established, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the period before the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-8(F) and (G), the rate of determining the variable display pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the variable display pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is lower immediately before the rescue time reduction). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display by a specific variable display pattern is executed in the specified period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means is more likely to execute suggestive effects in a predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS807 to S809, and also the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). Such a configuration makes the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage caused by ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B is provided with an explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) capable of executing an explanation performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-37 (A) and (B)), regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, which is a caption display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of means 1B to 3B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not the case, and the notice performance is executed less frequently when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result during a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than during the period before the predetermined period (e.g., the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 16-31. See FIG. 16-32 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is established but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance using a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result is not a specific display result, and the percentage of the preview performance being executed using the specific mode is higher when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the predetermined mode is higher, and the percentage of the preview performance being executed using the specific mode is lower during a predetermined period before a special condition is established (e.g., a period when the remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than during the period prior to the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 16-31. See Figures 16-32 (C) and (D)). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is performed in a specific mode during a specified period before the special condition is met, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C) below.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and a state control means that is controllable to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in Figure 16-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in Figure 16-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13), and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA3-1 (entry miss)). The state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, when a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS71 and 100IWS72). The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, but is not capable of determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-14, a portion that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and further includes a specific notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31, a portion that executes step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100; see FIG. 16-38 (G) and (H)) that is capable of executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met, and the player's interest when the special condition is met can be increased.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect that notifies that a specific display result is derived and displayed after executing an effect in a common manner with the specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIGS. 16-41 (G') and (H')). With such a configuration, after the player recognizes the establishment of a special condition, the player is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect to notify that the specific display result will be derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is met (for example, even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining variable pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) or variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β) in the same way as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is met and before it is met, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135 as shown in FIG. 16-15; see FIG. 16-36), and a notification effect execution means (e.g., the part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS847 as shown in FIG. 16-33) capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that control of the special state is about to begin is provided. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, and the effect can be clarified when switching the game state, and interest can be increased.

(Means 6C) Any of means 1C to 5C includes a signal output means for outputting a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met, at the start of the display period, and outputting a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state after outputting the specific signal (see, for example, Figures 16-18). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the specific signal and the special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 16-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions occurring externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied) and a special output means capable of executing a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which a right hit is expected, or an indication that a right hit is in progress), where the first start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, the next variable postponement process shown in FIG. 16-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D).

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) 16-13, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS71), and a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-48). The state control means determines whether or not a variable display pattern has been determined by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times that the variable display has been executed. When a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173, and The variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and further includes a special notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) that can execute a special notification effect (for example, display of a background image (orange) corresponding to a rescue time reduction) that notifies the player that control of the special state will begin after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, it is possible to commonize the variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity.

(Means 2D) Means 1D includes a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 16-27). Such a configuration can prevent the control process from becoming too complicated and also prevent inconsistencies from occurring in the presentation content.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 16-52 (C1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and also to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect for a predetermined period before the special condition is established. With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, an explanation performance execution means is provided that can execute an explanation performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Fig. 16-37(A) and (B) at the timing shown in Fig. 16-52(C1), (C2), Fig. 16-53(D), and Fig. 16-54(D). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and a variable display is executed. and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines whether or not a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS17 in the game control microcomputer 100). 3), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 16-7(C) and FIG. 16-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the execution count of the variable display reaches a specific count, the variable display is executed with the shortened variable display pattern more frequently, and the period until the control to the next advantageous state is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a variable display is executed. and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach performance (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-14). The state control means determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach performance (for example, a variable display pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and a variable display pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β)). The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after the control is made to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 16-7(C) and FIG. 16-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the execution count of the variable display reaches a specific count, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is reduced, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS634, S638 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 16-23) that can display different background displays on the display means for the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, the difference in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the prediction target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead prediction performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead prediction performances it executes between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703 as shown in Figure 16-27. See Figures 16-28 (A) and (B)). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to means 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer or a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 16-27). This configuration makes it possible to avoid complicating the control process and to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1a) to (Means 10a).

(Means 1a) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71), and the state control means can control to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player can be rescued in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing the player's motivation to play.

In this example, the initial value is set to the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not provide time reduction, jackpots that award a small number of game balls, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) may be provided, and the initial value of the rescue time reduction counter may not be set for some jackpots.

In this example, the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (for example, the part that executes steps 100IWS63, 100IWS71, 100IWS74, and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and the part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). With such a configuration, the player is relieved when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed in succession, so that a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) (e.g., a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in Fig. 16-17). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue of the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the state can be controlled to the special state again even after it has been controlled to the special state, it is possible to control the state to the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this example, the rescue time-saving count counter is updated in the low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), and low probability high base (time-saving state), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time-saving count counter may be configured to be updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), low probability high base (time-saving state), and high probability low base (latent high probability state). In this case, it is also applicable to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to the normal state in the high probability state.

In this example, the second special symbol is consumed first, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B may be provided in the first start winning port, a high probability low base (small win rush) may be provided where small wins occur frequently, the balls may be consumed in the order they are won, and the first and second special symbols may change simultaneously.

In this example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the reel may be configured to only provide the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to 3a, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS144, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured to be control to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become more than necessary.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), and the predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 7a) In Means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the game to a special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the player's chances of recovery.

(Means 8a) In the means 4a, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) is provided that can hold the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-11, a portion that executes step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., as shown in FIG. 16-11, a portion that executes steps 100IWS8 and 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 172), and can be controlled to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS172), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part shown in modified example 4 in FIG. 16-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to change the presentation mode.

(Means 10a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, a part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part that executes the above), and based on the execution of the special number of variable displays in the special state, it is possible to control again to the special state for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 in FIG. 16-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware that the situation is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1b-1), (Means 1b-2) to (Means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), and a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19). update means for updating numerical information based on execution of a variable display (for example, a portion for executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13); and process execution means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of the variable display and control of the advantageous state, and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion for executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion for executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13). 16-17, a portion which executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion which executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13), the processing execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion which executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, When the data value is a third value different from the first and second values, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100). In the normal state, the game medium is fired to the first path to play, and in the special state, the game medium is fired to the second path to play, and a launch promotion notification means (see FIG. 16-46) is provided that issues a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be fired to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to enable suitable control. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a performance related to the launch promotion notification early when being controlled to the special state.

(Means 1b-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that has a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a state control means that executes numerical information based on the execution of the variable display and a process execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13). the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 as shown in FIG. 16-17), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS67 as shown in FIG. 16-13), the processing execution means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS75 as shown in FIG. 5). The present invention is characterized in that the state control means executes steps S110 to S113 when the data value is a second value different from the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), executes a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third value different from the first and second values (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-43, the part executing steps 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and includes a presentation execution means (see FIG. 16-46) that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the game is being controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the game is controlled to the special state, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the game is controlled to the special state.

In this example, priority is given to processing related to the jackpot, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the system may be configured to prioritize processing related to the variable display or processing related to rescue time reduction.

In this example, a right-hit notification is given in the third process, the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the device may be configured to only execute a mode transition effect that suggests a transition to a time-saving state without giving a right-hit notification.

(Means 2b) In means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed). With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player and a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13), the processing execution means may be configured to change the special information from first information to second information when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), change the special information from second information to first information when the state control means controls to a special state (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-16), and execute different processing when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-14). With this configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed optimally by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-14). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines a variable display pattern for the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-15). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1c) to (means 6c) below.

(Means 1c) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 16-31), and the gaming control means is a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19). The game control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information capable of specifying a state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-12, a part for executing step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, a part for executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 16-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the status information control means sets the status information to a first numerical value in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, i.e., neither the time-shortening flag A nor C is set, and the corresponding data is "0"), and sets the status information to a second numerical value when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state is controlled based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes step 100IWS537 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, i.e., the time-saving flag A is set and the data corresponding to the time-saving flag A is "1"), when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition, the state information is set to a third value different from the first and second values (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, i.e., the time-saving flag C is set and the data corresponding to the time-saving flag C is "1"), the game control means is capable of transmitting specific information to the performance control means, and is capable of transmitting specific information according to the case where the state information is the second value or the third value when in a special state (for example, the part shown in FIG. 16-10, the part that executes step 100IWS540 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, as shown in FIG. 16-19, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, as shown in FIG. 16-17). With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, different game states can be easily identified, making control easier, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the presentation can be executed appropriately when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

In this example, a time-saving state A designation command or a time-saving state C designation command is sent as the specific information, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the background designation command or the variation pattern command may be configured to be sent in a manner that allows identification that the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state. Also, for example, when a jackpot is hit, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) may be sent in different modes depending on the game state, and the fanfare period or ending period may change depending on which command is received.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3c) In means 1c or 2c, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 is the part that executes steps 100IWS634, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4c) In any of means 1c to 3c, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., the presentation control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 100IWS636, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, and improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1d) to (Means 4d).

(Means 1d) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a presentation control means that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 16-31), and The means include a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a portion executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13), and a control means for controlling the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS72 in the game control microcomputer 100). and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the special number of times, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17), and the update means changes the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the gaming control means can transmit predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a suggestion presentation regarding the number of times the variable display is executed during a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-22, the part that executes step 100IWS630 in the presentation control CPU 120). With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be made possible. For example, players can be motivated to play from the opening of the gaming facility, which can increase the operating rate of the gaming machines.

In this example, the initial result is shown as a suggestive effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to execute suggestive effects such as a change in the background, effects during the change up to 100 spins, or displays on the demo screen or menu screen.

When a command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 16-12) is sent, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the rescue time reduction is reached as an initial value and execute the performance.

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information held in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration allows for suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, this provides players with an incentive to play from the opening of the gaming facility, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing burden.

In this example, a command capable of identifying the value of the rescue time reduction counter is sent upon recovery, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a command capable of identifying a predetermined range, such as 1 to 99 rotations in 100 rotation increments, 100 to 199 rotations, ... 500 to 599 rotations, may be sent, or a command may be sent that cannot identify rescue time reduction counter values of 128 or more, but can identify counter values of 127 or less.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the presentation control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a special presentation related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-9, the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-9, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, the risk of unknowingly inflicting losses can be reduced and processing of specific information can be efficiently achieved.

Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is sent when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value, but this is not the only possible aspect. For example, it may be configured not to send the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value.

(Means 4d) In any of means 1d to 3d, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 16-39(I) to FIG. 16-40(M)), and to execute a suggestive presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the special number of variable displays is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 16-37(A) to FIG. 16-38(F)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In this example, the presentation is executed based on the count value of the rescue time reduction counter, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of changes and execute the presentation after resetting the rescue time reduction counter.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1e-1) and (Means 1e-2).

(Means 1e-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 16-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means for controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion for executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a portion for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19); an update means for updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) for holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped; and an initialization means (e.g., a portion executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-14) capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information regarding the number of times the game has been derived and displayed successively. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and a portion executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). The update means is The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 16-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing the setting value increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1e-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 16-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means capable of controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-19); an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped; and a predetermined display result when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and a part executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). The update means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-13, and a part executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 16-17). The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 16-47). With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to enable suitable control. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing the setting value increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

In this example, only fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to use multiple fluctuation pattern tables, just like after a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1f) to (means 15h) below may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means is controllable to the special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special condition is established when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed. The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled to, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the special advantageous state is a special jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a regular jackpot, the time-shortened state after the special jackpot time-shortened state is more advantageous than the time-shortened state after a regular jackpot, and the time-shortened state for the rescue time-shortened state is more advantageous than the time-shortened state after a regular jackpot.

(Means 2f) In means 1f, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, while preventing excessive gambling from occurring due to the special number of times being the same between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations of 800 times, which is the condition for controlling to the rescue time-saving state, is the same when controlling to a jackpot based on the first special pattern and when controlling to a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3f) Means 1f or 2f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state that is higher than the first probability, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is the unfavorable setting value than when the setting is the advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different advantageous degrees for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of fluctuations that are the conditions for control to the rescue time reduction to be smaller when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so that the advantageous degree in the rescue time reduction is higher than the advantageous degree in the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") has a higher rate of achieving rescue time reduction than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times the number of time reductions (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the number of time reductions is 100).

(Means 4f) Any of means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5f) In any of means 1f to 4f, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratio of control for normal jackpots and special jackpots is made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of Figure 16-8 (E).

(Means 7f) Any of means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of Figure 16-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to 7f, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information and specific numerical information of the special information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8f may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 16-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display; a variable display execution means that can execute a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition; a hold memory means that can store information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup memory means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information when power supply is stopped; and a backup memory means that can store the hold information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game includes an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means, and a restoration means capable of executing restoration control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means when power supply is started, and the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information after the restoration control is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the initialization process is executed, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are reset, while when the power outage is restored, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the reserved memory at the time of restoration reaches the 800th fluctuation and the condition for control to the rescue time reduction is met, the rescue time reduction can be controlled.

(Means 2g) In means 1g, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed, while preventing excessive gambling tendency from increasing due to the special number of times being the same when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations that is the condition for control to the rescue time-saving state is the same when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3g) Means 1g or 2g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability higher than the first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is the unfavorable setting value than when the setting is the advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

To apply the gaming machine of means 3g to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of changes until the rescue time reduction is started to be smaller for an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than for an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so that the degree of advantage in the rescue time reduction is higher than the degree of advantage in the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") is more likely to result in a miss than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and therefore is more likely to result in a rescue time reduction, and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the time reduction is 100 times).

(Means 4b) Any of means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of a special state among the multiple types to which the game is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the game is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5g) In any of means 1g to 4g, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratios controlled for normal jackpots and special jackpots are made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6g) Any of means 1g to 5g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 16-8 (E).

(Means 7g) Any of means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 16-8 (E).

(Means 8g) In any of means 1g to 7g, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8g may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 16-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of a specific display result, includes a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means further includes a suggestive performance execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and can execute a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition, and the suggestive performance execution means has a ratio of which of a plurality of performance modes is used to execute the suggestive performance depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, and the performance mode of the suggestive performance is a mode that suggests the period until the special condition is established. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is sufficient to configure it so that the ratio of whether or not to execute a countdown effect that indicates the number of fluctuations that is the condition for controlling the rescue time reduction is changed according to the count value of the rescue time reduction counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by a configuration that determines whether or not to execute a caption display while waiting for customers and the presentation mode, using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 16-25.

(Means 2h) In means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be specified. With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown presentation that indicates the number of fluctuations that will be the condition for controlling the rescue time reduction.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a number of different forms that differ in at least one of color and size, and the period until the suggested special condition is met differs depending on the form in which the specific image is displayed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the form of the specific image.

In this characteristic section 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 3h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 16-25 is used to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers and the presentation mode. In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3h, for example, the color and size of the countdown numbers in the countdown presentation image may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the rescue time-saving counter.

(Means 4h) Any of means 1h to 3h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 4h is configured to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers, for example, using the table shown in FIG. 16-25.

(Means 5h) Any of means 1h to 4h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggested performance manner and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 5h is based on a configuration in which the presentation mode of the caption display while waiting for customers is determined using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 16-25.

(Means 6h) Any of means 1h to 5h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance based on at least one of detecting that the operating means has been operated and that the gaming medium has passed through a predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. With such a configuration, a suggestive performance can be performed for a player who actually plays a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 6h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the demo state is entered, if a gaming ball is detected at the operation of the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or the start hole, a caption indicating the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is executed is displayed.

(Means 7h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing suggestive performance depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 7h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 16-25 to determine whether or not to display subtitles while passengers are waiting.

(Means 8h) Any of means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing a suggestive performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 8h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 16-25 to determine whether or not to display a caption while waiting for customers and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 9h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance with a different execution rate depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during waiting for customers is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 10h) In any of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect in a specific manner regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

To apply the gaming machine of means 10h to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance with a different execution rate depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during customer waiting in the red performance mode is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 11h) In any of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means executes suggestive performances at a different rate in a specific period after the start of power supply depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or whether a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 11c to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is sufficient to configure the machine so that the rate at which the captions and countdown effects are displayed while customers are waiting differs between after the initialization process and after the power outage is restored.

(Means 12h) Any of means 1h to 11h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means for executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met and a variable display based on the special variable display pattern is being executed without determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met. With such a configuration, the player can be notified that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met, and the player can be clearly notified of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 12h is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the pattern table for the rescue time-saving variation miss shown in Figure 16-8 (I).

(Means 13h) Any of means 1h to 12h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is established than in a period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 13h is based on a configuration that uses the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 16-8 (F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any of means 1h to 13h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a specified period before a special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 14h is configured to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 16-32.

(Means 15h) Any of means 1h to 14h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific manner and a predetermined manner in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the preview performance is executed more frequently in the specific manner than in the predetermined manner when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed more frequently in the specific manner in the predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 16-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a variable display is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area;
The specific performance is,
the display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs a performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first specific performance and a second specific performance having a higher expectation level that is controlled to be in the advantageous state than the first specific performance,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The performance execution means includes:
The first display area is capable of displaying the effected video,
In the second display area, information display relating to a game can be displayed;
During the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while the effected moving image in an effect manner progressing at a first speed is displayed in the first display area,
During the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effected moving image in an effect mode proceeding at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
When executing the specific performance, the light emitting state of the light emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period,
When the first specific performance is executed, the light emitting state of the light emitting means can be changed at the same intervals during the first period and the second period;
When the second specific performance is executed, the light emission state of the light emitting means can be changed at an interval shorter than the first period during the second period;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in a normal state, the game control means is capable of controlling the game to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state;
The performance execution means includes:
In the second period, after displaying the effect video proceeding at the second speed, a still effect is executed in which a still image is displayed by freezing the effect video,
There are a plurality of still effects.
Depending on which of the presentation modes of the still presentation is, the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state is different,
The performance execution means includes:
The information display is operable to be displayed;
The information display operation is continued even during the still performance,
The information display can be displayed at the same operation speed in both the first period and the second period,
A plurality of types of common special effects can be executed when the variable display result is the specific display result and when the variable display result is the special display result;
After the special effect is executed, a special effect suggesting that the special display result will be obtained can be executed .
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images